|
Toshiba Personal Computer
PORTÉGÉ M500
Maintenance Manual
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
File Number 960-559
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
This maintenance manual describes how to perform hardware service maintenance for the
Toshiba Personal Computer PORTÉGÉ M500.
The procedures described in this manual are intended to help service technicians isolate
faulty Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and replace them in the field.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Four types of messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your
attention. Each of these messages will be italicized and identified as shown below.
DANGER: “Danger” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in death or
serious bodily injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
WARNING: “Warning” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in bodily
injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
CAUTION: “Caution” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in property
damage, if the safety instruction is not observed.
NOTE: “Note” contains general information that relates to your safe maintenance
service.
Improper repair of the computer may result in safety hazards. Toshiba requires service
technicians and authorized dealers or service providers to ensure the following safety
precautions are adhered to strictly.
‰ Be sure to fasten screws securely with the right screwdriver. If a screw is not fully
fastened, it could come loose, creating a danger of a short circuit, which could cause
overheating, smoke or fire.
‰ If you replace the battery pack or RTC battery, be sure to use only the same model
battery or an equivalent battery recommended by Toshiba. Installation of the wrong
battery can cause the battery to explode.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manual is divided into the following parts:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Hardware Overview describes the PORTÉGÉ M500 system unit and
each FRU.
Troubleshooting Procedures explains how to diagnose and resolve
FRU problems.
Test and Diagnostics describes how to perform test and diagnostic
operations for maintenance service.
Replacement Procedures describes the removal and replacement of the
FRUs.
Appendices The appendices describe the following:
‰ Handling the LCD module
‰ Board layout
‰ Pin assignments
‰ Keyboard scan/character codes
‰ Key layout
‰ Wiring diagrams
‰ BIOS rewrite procedures
‰ EC/KBC rewrite procedures
‰ Reliability
iv
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conventions
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and
operating procedures.
Acronyms
On the first appearance and whenever necessary for clarification acronyms are enclosed in
parentheses following their definition. For example:
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Keys
Keys are used in the text to describe many operations. The key top symbol as it appears on
the keyboard is printed in boldface type.
Key operation
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify such
operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus (+) sign. For example, Ctrl + Pause
(Break) means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press Pause (Break). If
three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same time press the third.
User input
Text that you are instructed to type in is shown in the boldface type below:
DISKCOPY A: B:
The display
Text generated by the computer that appears on its display is presented in the type face
below:
Format complete
System transferred
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Features...................................................................................................................... 1-1
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive......................................................................................... 1-12
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 1-14
Optical Drive............................................................................................................ 1-15
TFT Color Display................................................................................................... 1-17
Power Supply........................................................................................................... 1-19
Batteries ................................................................................................................... 1-21
AC Adaptor.............................................................................................................. 1-23
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Troubleshooting......................................................................................................... 2-1
Troubleshooting Flowchart........................................................................................ 2-3
Power Supply Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 2-7
System Board Troubleshooting................................................................................ 2-19
USB FDD Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 2-36
HDD Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 2-39
Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting.............................................................. 2-44
Display Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-47
Optical Drive Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 2-49
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-51
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 2-53
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 2-54
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting............................................................................... 2-56
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting............................................................................................ 2-58
2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting......................................................................... 2-61
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting......................................................................... 2-62
vi
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
The Diagnostic Test................................................................................................... 3-1
Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-4
Setting of the hardware configuration ....................................................................... 3-9
Heatrun Test............................................................................................................. 3-11
Subtest Names.......................................................................................................... 3-12
System Test.............................................................................................................. 3-14
Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-16
Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-17
Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-18
3.10 Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-21
3.11 Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-23
3.12 Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-25
3.13 Hard Disk Test......................................................................................................... 3-26
3.14 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-29
3.15 NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.16 Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-32
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-34
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names......................................................................... 3-35
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status ................................................................................... 3-38
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST................................................................................................... 3-40
3.21 Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-47
3.22 Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-48
3.23 Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-50
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-51
3.25 System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-56
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros) ................................................................... 3-58
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)...................................................... 3-65
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program .................................................. 3-69
3.29 Sound Test program................................................................................................. 3-84
3.30 SETUP ..................................................................................................................... 3-90
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
General....................................................................................................................... 4-1
Battery pack ............................................................................................................... 4-8
PC card..................................................................................................................... 4-10
Bridge media............................................................................................................ 4-11
HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-12
Optical drive............................................................................................................. 4-15
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-18
Memory module....................................................................................................... 4-21
Cover FAT assembly ............................................................................................... 4-23
4.10 Fingerprint sensor board .......................................................................................... 4-28
4.11 Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-30
4.12 SW membrane.......................................................................................................... 4-32
4.13 Bluetooth module..................................................................................................... 4-34
4.14 Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-36
4.15 MDC (Modem Daughter Card)................................................................................ 4-38
4.16 Internal microphone................................................................................................. 4-40
4.17 RTC battery ............................................................................................................. 4-42
4.18 Harness holder/LAN cable....................................................................................... 4-44
4.19 System board/DC-IN jack........................................................................................ 4-47
4.20 Modem jack/Wireless communication SW.............................................................. 4-50
4.21 Fan/CPU................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.22 HDD cable/PC card slot........................................................................................... 4-57
4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter............................................................................................... 4-59
4.24 Speaker/LCD cable.................................................................................................. 4-65
4.25 Cover latch............................................................................................................... 4-67
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna............................................................... 4-68
4.27 Hinge........................................................................................................................ 4-70
4.28 Battery slider............................................................................................................ 4-72
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp..................................................................................................... 4-73
viii
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ........................................................................... A-1
Appendix B Board Layout ................................................................................................ B-1
Appendix C Pin Assignments............................................................................................ C-1
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes .................................................................. D-1
Appendix E Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................F-1
Appendix G BIOS rewrite Procedures .............................................................................. G-1
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite Procedures......................................................................... H-1
Appendix I Reliability........................................................................................................I-1
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Hardware Overview
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1-ii
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
Chapter 1
Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Features.......................................................................................................................1-1
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive .........................................................................................1-12
Keyboard ..................................................................................................................1-14
Optical Drive ............................................................................................................1-15
1.4.1
1.4.2
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW Drive .........................................................1-15
DVD-Super Multi Drive .....................................................................1-16
1.5
TFT Color Display ...................................................................................................1-17
1.5.1
1.5.2
LCD Module .......................................................................................1-17
FL Inverter Board ...............................................................................1-18
1.6
1.7
Power Supply............................................................................................................1-19
Batteries....................................................................................................................1-21
1.7.1
1.7.2
Main Battery .......................................................................................1-21
RTC battery.........................................................................................1-22
1.8
AC Adaptor ..............................................................................................................1-23
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
Figures
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-5
Figure 1-6
Front of the computer .....................................................................................1-5
System unit configuration...............................................................................1-5
System unit block diagram .............................................................................1-6
2.5-inch HDD ...............................................................................................1-12
Keyboard ......................................................................................................1-14
LCD module .................................................................................................1-17
Tables
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 1-3
Table 1-4
Table 1-5
Table 1-6
Table 1-7
Table 1-8
Table 1-9
Table 1-10
Table 1-11
2.5-inch HDD specifications ........................................................................1-12
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive specifications...............................................1-15
DVD Super Multi drive specifications.........................................................1-16
LCD module specifications ..........................................................................1-17
FL inverter board specifications...................................................................1-18
Power supply output rating...........................................................................1-20
Battery specifications ...................................................................................1-21
Time required for charges ............................................................................1-21
Data preservation time..................................................................................1-22
RTC battery charging/data preservation time...............................................1-22
AC adapter specifications.............................................................................1-23
1-iv
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
1
Features
1.1 Features
The Toshiba PORTÉGÉ M500 Personal Computer uses advanced Large Scale Integration
(LSI), and Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) technology extensively to
provide compact size, minimum weight, low power usage and high reliability. This computer
incorporates the following features.
There some models and options according to BTO system. Refer to the Parts List for the
configuration of each model and options.
‰ Microprocessor
The PORTÉGÉ M500 computer is equipped with one of the following processors.
Intel® CoreTM Duo
CoreTM Duo
1.66GHz (Processor Number : T2300)
1.83GHz (Processor Number : T2400)
2.00GHz (Processor Number : T2500)
2.16GHz (Processor Number : T2600)
2.33GHz (Processor Number : T2700)
Intel® CoreTM Solo
CoreTM Solo
1.66GHz (Processor Number : T1300)
1.83GHz (Processor Number : T1400)
Intel® Celeron® M
Celeron® M
1.46GHz (Processor Number : 410)
1.60GHz (Processor Number : 420)
1.73GHz (Processor Number : 430)
‰ Chipset
Equipped with Intel 945GM/940GML as North Bridge, Intel ICH7-M as South Bridge
and Texas Instrument PCI7412 as Card Controller.
‰ VGA Controller
An internal Graphics Controller in North Bridge is used.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
‰ Memory
Two DDR2-533/DDR2-667 SDRAM slots. Memory modules can be installed to provide
a maximum of 4GB (Intel 945GM) or 2GB (Intel 940GML). Memory modules are
available in 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB and 2048MB sizes.
‰ HDD
The computer has a 2.5-inch SATA HDD. The following capacities are available.
•
40/60/80/100/120 GB
‰ USB FDD
A 3.5-inch USB FDD accommodates 2HD (1.44MB) or 2DD (720KB) disks.
‰ Optical Drive
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive or DVD Super Multi drive (double layer) can be installed.
‰ Display
LCD : Built-in 12.1 inch, 16M colors, WXGA (1280×800dots), thin type low
temperature poly-silicon TFT color display.
External monitor : Supported via an RGB connector.
‰ Keyboard
An-easy-to-use 84(US)/85(UK)-key keyboard provides a numeric keypad overlay for fast
numeric data entry or for cursor and page control. The keyboard also includes two keys
that have special functions in Microsoft® Windows® 2000/XP. It supports software that
uses a 101- or 102-key enhanced keyboard.
‰ Touch pad
A Touch Pad and control buttons in the palm rest enable control of the on-screen pointer
and scrolling of windows.
‰ Batteries
The computer has two batteries: a rechargeable Lithium-Ion main battery pack and RTC
battery (that backs up the Real Time Clock and CMOS memory).
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
‰ Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0)
Three USB ports are provided. The ports comply with the USB2.0 standard.
‰ IEEE 1394 port
The computer comes with one IEEE 1394 port. It enables high-speed data transfer
directly from external devices such as digital video cameras.
‰ External monitor (RGB) port
The port enables connection of an external monitor, which is recognized automatically by
Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) Display Data Channel (DDC) 2B
compatible functions.
‰ PC card slot
A PC card slot is provided. The PC card slot (PCMCIA) accommodates one Type II card.
‰ Bridge media slot
This supports one SD memory card/SDIO card/Memory stick/Memory stick PRO/xD
picture card/MultiMediaCard slot. Data can be read and written by inserting each media
to the slot.
‰ Fingerprint sensor
The computer is equipped with a fingerprint sensor and fingerprint authentication utility.
They enable only person who has registered his/her fingerprint to use the computer.
‰ Sound system
The sound system is equipped with the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
Stereo speakers
Built-in microphone
Volume control
Stereo headphone jack
External microphone jack
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
‰ Internal modem
The computer contains a MDC, enabling data and fax communication. It supports ITU-T
V.90 (V.92). The transfer rates are 56 Kbps for data reception, 33.6 Kbps for data
transmission, and 14,400 bps for fax transmission. However, the actual speed depends on
the line quality. The RJ11 modem jack is used to accommodate a telephone line. Both of
V.90 and V.92 are supported only in USA, Canada and Australia. Only V.90 is available
in other regions.
‰ Internal LAN
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-
T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet
LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T). It also supports Wakeup on LAN
(WOL), Magic Packet and LED. Some models are not equipped with a Gigabit Ethernet
LAN.
‰ Wireless LAN
The computer is equipped with PCI Express Mini Card type wireless LAN card that
supports 802.11 b/g or 802.11 a/b/g in the PCI Express MiniCard slot. This function can
be switched on and off by a switch on the computer.
‰ Bluetooth
The computer is equipped with Bluetooth (V2.0+EDR) communications standard enable
wireless connection between electronic devices such as computers and printers. It
supports wireless communication switch.
‰ Presentation button
This button switches the display between internal display, external display, simultaneous
display and multi-monitor display.
‰ TOSHIBA Assist button
When this button is pressed during power-on, the PC is connected to “Toshiba Assist”.
When this button is pressed during power-off, the PC is turned on and connected to
“Toshiba Assist”.
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
The front of the computer is shown in figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Front of the computer
The system unit configuration is shown in figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 System unit configuration
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
System Unit Block Diagram
Figure 1-3 is a block diagram of the system unit.
Figure 1-3 System unit block diagram
1-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
The system unit is composed of the following major components:
‰ Processor
Intel® CoreTM Duo Processor (dual core) or Intel® CoreTM Solo Processor (single
core)
• Core speed:
Dual core:
1.66GHz (T2300) /1.83GHz (T2400)/2.00GHz (T2500)/
2.16GHz (T2600)/2.33GHz (T2700)
Single core 1.66GHz (T1300)/1.83GHz (T1400)
): Processor Number
(
– Processor bus speed: 667MHz
– Core voltage: 0.50 to 1.30V
– Integrated L1 cache memory of 64KB (32KB +32KB)
– Integrated L2 cache memory of 2MB
– Integrated NDP
– 478-pin Micro FC-PGA package
Intel® Celeron® M Processor
• Core speed:
1.46GHz (410)/1.60GHz (420)/1.72GHz (430)
(
): Processor Number
– Processor bus speed: 533MHz
– Core voltage: 1.00 to 1.30V
– Integrated L1 cache memory of 64KB (32KB +32KB)
– Integrated L2 cache memory of 1MB
– Integrated NDP
– 478-pin Micro FC-PGA package
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
‰ Memory
Two memory slots capable of accepting DDR2-SDRAM 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB or
2048MB memory modules for a maximum of 4GB (Intel 945GM) or 2GB (Intel
940GML).
• 200-pin Small Outline DIMM
• 1.8V operation
• PC2-4200(DDR2-533)/PC2-5300(DDR2-667) support
‰ Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
• One STMicro M25PE80-VMW6TG is used.
• 8Mbits of flash memory are used.
– 320KB for System BIOS
– 64KB for VGA BIOS
– 64KB for Finger Print PBA
– 128KB for LAN BIOS
– 24KB for Boot
– 16KB for Parameter Block
– 32KB for Option Log
– Others
‰ North Bridge
• One Intel 945GM/940GML is used.
• Features:
– Supports Yonah Processor System Bus
– Supports System Memory : DDR2-400/DDR2-533/DDR2-667,
4GB (Intel 945GM) (max) or 2GB (Intel 940GML) (max)
– Internal Graphics Controller : Inter Generation 3.5 Integrated GFX Core
(250MHz)
– DMI(Direct Media Interface)
– Supports ICH.
– 1466-ball 37.5×37.5×2.56mm FC-BGA package
1-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
‰ South Bridge (Intel ICH7-M)
• Features:
– DMI(Direct Media Interface)
– PCI Express I/F (4 ports)
– PCI Bus I/F Rev2.3 (6 PCI REQ/GNT Pairs)
– Integrated Serial ATA Host Controller (2 Prots,150MB/S)
– Integrated IDE Controller (Ultra ATA 100/66/33)
– AC’97 2.3 codecs
– Intel High Definition controller (Azalia)
– USB 1.1/2.0 Controller 8 ports
– Built-in LAN controller (WfM 2.0 & IEEE 802.3 compliance)
– Power Management (ACPI 2.0 compliance)
– SMBus2.0 controller
– Low Pin Count (LPC) interface (EC/KBC, Super I/O)
– IRQ controller
– Serial Interrupt Function
– Suspend/Resume control
– Built –in RTC
– GPIO
– 652-ball 31×31×2.51mm BGA Package
‰ PC Card Controller (TI PCI7412)
− PCI I/F
− CardBus / Ultra media Controller (1 socket)
− SD/MMC, Memory Stick, XD Card Controller
− 1394 Controller (2 ports)
– 288-ball, 16×16×1.4mm, BGA Package
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
‰ GPU
Graphics interface in North Bridge (Intel 945GM/940GML) is used.
− PCI Express Interface
− LCD Interface LVDS 2ch, Supports UXGA (1600×1200)
− Analog CRT : 400MHz RAMDAC, QXGA (2048×1536) monitor
− Does not support DVI
‰ Sound Controller
• Azalia Link (Intel High Definition Audio I/F) built in the South Bridge (ICH7-M) +
ADI AD1981HD
− Stereo speakers
− Built-in microphone
− Volume control
− Stereo headphone jack
− External microphone jack
‰ Modem Controller
• Askey/FOXCONN-made one MDC is used.
• This controller has the following functions:
– One RJ11 port
– V.92 (V.90) 56K Modem/FAX
– Supports Ring Wakeup
1-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
‰ Internal LAN Controller
• Intel made Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN
(100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) or Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits
per second, 1000BASE-T) is used. Some models are not equipped with a Gigabit
Ethernet LAN.
• This controller has the following functions:
– PCI-Ex connection
– Supports Gigabit Ethernet
– Supports Fast Ethernet
– One RJ45 port
– Supports WOL
– Supports Magic Packet
– Supports LED
– Makes LAN to “Disable” in BIOS
‰ Wireless LAN
•
One Mini PCI Express Card slot
− Supports 802.11b/g or 802.11a/b/g
− Supports Communication SW
− Supports W-LAN via PCMCIA (Euro : GSM/GPRS)
− Does not support WOL
‰ Other main system chips
•
•
•
•
•
•
Clock Generator (ICS-made 954321AGLFT)
EC/KBC (Renesas-made M306KAFCLRP U0)
PSC (Toshiba-made TMP86FS49UG)
Temperature sensor (ADM-made 1032ARMZ ×2)
Acceleration sensor (ST Micro-made LIS3L02AQ3)
TPM (Infineon-made SLB9635 TT 1.2)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.2 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
1.2 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
The removable HDD is a random access non-volatile storage device. It has a non-removable
2.5-inch magnetic disk and mini-Winchester type magnetic heads.
The computer supports a 40GB, 60GB, 80GB, 100GB or 120GB.
The HDD is shown in figure 1-4. Specifications are listed in Table 1-1.
Figure 1-4 2.5-inch HDD
Table 1-1 2.5-inch HDD specifications (1/2)
Specifications
Items
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
HDD2D34BZK01
HDD2D35BZK01
HDD2D32BZK01
HDD2D30BZK01
Outline
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Weight (g)
69.85±0.25
9.5±0.2
100±0.41
dimensions
98 max.
102 max.
Storage size (formatted)
Speed (RPM)
40GB
60GB
80GB
100GB
5,400
Data transfer rate (Mb/s)
Data buffer size (KB)
218-429
244.7-474.7
8,192
218-429
236.1-456.0
16,384
Average seek time (ms)
Read
12
Motor startup time (s)
4 typ.
3.5 typ.
4 typ.
1-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
1 Hardware Overview
Table 1-1 2.5-inch HDD specifications (2/2)
Specifications
Items
Width (mm)
HITACHI GST
HITACHI GST
G8BC00029611
HITACHI GST
G8BC00029811
HITACHI GST
G8BC00029411
G8BC00029A11
69.85±0.25
Outline
9.5±0.2
100.2±0.25
dimensions
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Weight (g)
95 max.
40GB
102 max.
Storage size (formatted)
Speed (RPM)
60GB
80GB
100GB
5,400
Data transfer rate
To/From media
To/From host
493 Mb/s max.
1.5Gbps
Data buffer size (MB)
8
12
Average seek time (ms)
Read
Motor startup time (s)
3.5 typ.
Specifications
Items
TOSHIBA
HITACHI GST
HDD2D31BZK01
69.85±0.25
9.5±0.2
G8BC0002NA10
69.85±0.25
9.5±0.2
Outline
Width (mm)
dimensions
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Weight (g)
100±0.41
102 max.
100.2±0.25
115 max.
Storage size (formatted)
Speed (RPM)
120GB
5,400
100GB
7,200
Data transfer rate
To/From media (Mb/s)
To/From host (Gbps)
244.7-474.7
-
629 max.
1.5
Data buffer size (KB)
8,192
12
8,192
10 typ.
4 typ.
Average seek time (ms)
Read
Motor startup time (s)
3.5 typ.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.3 Keyboard
1.3 Keyboard
The keyboard is mounted 84(US)/85(UK) keys that consist of character key and control key.
The keyboard is connected to membrane connector on the system board and controlled by the
keyboard controller.
Figure 1-5 is a view of the keyboard.
See Appendix E about a layout of the keyboard.
Figure 1-5 Keyboard
1-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Optical Drive
1 Hardware Overview
1.4 Optical Drive
1.4.1 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW Drive
The DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-
inch) CD-ROM, DVD-ROM and CD-R/RW.
The specifications of the DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive are described in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive specifications
Specifications
Item
MATSUSHITA G8CC00025A20
Outline
dimensions
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Mass (g)
128 (excluding projections)
9.5 (excluding projections)
129 (excluding projections)
141±3
Data transfer speed (Read)
DVD-ROM
CD-ROM
Max. 8x CAV
Max. 24x CAV
Data transfer speed (Write)
CD-R
CD-RW
High Speed CD-RW
Ultra Speed CD-RW
Max. 24x CAV
Max. 4x CLV
Max. 10x CLV
Max. 24x CAV
ATAPI Burst (MB/s)
16.6 (PIO MODE4)
16.6 (Multi Word Mode2)
33.3 (Ultra DMA Mode2)
PIO Mode
DMA Mode
Ultra DMA Mode
Data Buffer Capacity
2MB
Access time (ms)
CD-ROM
DVD-ROM
150 typ. (Random)
170 typ. (Random)
Supported Disks
CD: CD/CD-ROM (12cm, 8cm), CD-R,
CD-RW
DVD:DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-RAM,
DVD-R DL, DVD+RW, DVD+RAM,
DVD+R DL
Supported Formats
CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA,
PHOTO CD, CD-Extra(CD+), CD-text
DVD:DVD-R, DVD-RW (Ver.1.2),
DVD-Video, DVD+R, DVD+RW,
DVD-RAM (2.6GB/4.7GB)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.4 Optical Drive
1.4.2 DVD-Super Multi Drive
The DVD Super Multi drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-inch)
CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-
RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL.
The specifications are listed in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 DVD Super Multi drive specifications
Item
Specifications
MATSUSHITA G8CC00030120
128 (excluding projections)
9.5 (excluding projections)
129 (excluding projections)
140±5
Outline
dimensions
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Mass (g)
Data transfer speed (Read)
DVD-ROM
CD-ROM
Max. 8x CAV
Max. 24x CAV
Data transfer speed (Write)
CD-R
CD-RW
Max. 24x ZCLV
Max. 4x CLV
High Speed CD-RW
Ultra Speed CD-RW
DVD-R
Max. 10x CLV
Max. 16x CLV
Max. 8x ZCLV
Max. 2x CLV
DVD-R DL
DVD-RW
DVD+R
DVD+R DL
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
Max. 4x ZCLV
Max. 8x ZCLV
Max. 2.4x CLV
Max. 4x ZCLV
Max. 2-3x ZCLV (4.7GB)
ATAPI Burst (MB/s)
PIO Mode
DMA Mode
16.6 (PIO MODE4)
16.6 (Multi Word Mode2)
33.3 (Ultra DMA Mode2)
Ultra DMA Mode
Data Buffer Capacity
2MB
Access time (ms)
CD-ROM
DVD-ROM
150Msec typ.
180msec typ.
Supported Disks
CD: CD/CD-ROM (12cm, 8cm), CD-R, CD-RW
DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL,
DVD+RW, DVD+RAM, DVD+R DL
Supported Formats
CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA, Photo CD (multi-
Session), Video CD, CD-Extra (CD+), CD-text
DVD:DVD-VIDEO, DVD-ROM, DVD-R (3.9GB, 4.7GB),
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (Ver.1.1, Ver.1.2), DVD-RAM,
DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD+RW
1-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5 TFT Color Display
1 Hardware Overview
1.5 TFT Color Display
The TFT color display consists of 12.1-inch WXGA LCD module and FL inverter board.
1.5.1 LCD Module
The LCD module used for the TFT color display uses a backlight as the light source and can
display a maximum of 16M colors with 1,200 x 800 resolution. The GPU in North Bridge
can control internal and external WXGA support displays simultaneously.
Figure 1-6 shows a view of the LCD module and Table 1-4 lists the specifications.
Figure 1-6 LCD module
Table 1-4 LCD module specifications
Specifications
Item
12.1-inch WXGA TFT (TMD G33C0003C110)
Number of Dots
1,280(W) x 800(H)
0.204(H) x 0.204(V)
275.8(H) x 178.0(V)
Dot spacing (mm)
Display range (mm)
Specifications
12.1-inch WXGA TFT (SAMSUNG G33C0003K110)
1,280(W) x 800(H)
Item
Number of Dots
Dot spacing (mm)
Display range (mm)
0.204(H) x 0.204(V)
275.8(H) x 178.0(V)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.5 TFT Color Display
1.5.2
FL Inverter Board
The FL inverter board supplies a high frequency current to illuminate the LCD module.
Table 1-5 lists the FL inverter board specifications.
Table 1-5 FL inverter board specifications
Item
Specifications
G71C00011221
Input
Voltage (VDC)
5
7
Power (W)
Output
Voltage (Vrms)
Current (mArms)
Power (W/VA)
750
6.00
5/7
1-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.6 Power Supply
1 Hardware Overview
1.6 Power Supply
The power supply supplies many different voltages to the system board and performs the
following functions:
1. Judges that the DC power supply (AC adapter) is connected to the computer.
2. Detects DC output and circuit malfunctions.
3. Controls the display of battery icon and DC IN icon.
4. Turns the battery charging system on and off and detects a fully charged battery.
5. Turns the power supply on and off.
6. Provides the detection of a low battery.
7. Calculates the remaining battery capacity.
8. Controls the transmission of the status signal of the main battery.
The power supply output rating is specified in Table 1-6.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.6 Power Supply
Table 1-6 Power supply output rating
Power supply
Power OFF
Name
Voltage
Power OFF
No
(Suspend
mode)
Object
[V]
(Boot mode) battery
1.500 -
0.300
PPV
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
CPU
PTV
1.05
1.5
CPU, GMCH, ICH7-M
CPU, GMCH, ICH7-M,
PCI-e Mini Card
1R5-P1V
1R8-B1V
2R5-P2V
1.8
2.5
2.5
0.9
0.9
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
GMCH, DDR2-SDRAM
GMCH, ICH7-M
LAN
Yes
No
LAN2R5-E2V
MR0R9-B0V
0R9-P0V
Yes
Yes
No
Yes / No
No
GMCH, DDR2-SDRAM
DDR2-SDRAM
No
Clock Generator, Thermal
Sensor, GMCH,
SDRAM(SPD), ICH7-M,
HDD, PC-Card Cont., PC-
Card Power, PCI-e Mini Card
(WLAN), FWH, LED, TPM,
LCD, AD1981HD
P3V
3.3
No
No
No
ICH7-M, PCI-e Mini Card
(WLAN), MDC, Serial Flash,
Finger Sensor
E3V
3.3
Yes
Yes / No
No
S3V
FM-P3V
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
1.2
No
No
No
No
No
EC/KBC
Flash Media
Bluetooth
LAN
Yes
No
Yes
No
BT-P3V
No
No
LAN-E3V
LAN1R2-E1V
Yes
Yes
Yes / No
Yes / No
LAN
ICH7-M, ODD, HDD, PC-
Card Power, LED, KB, PAD,
CRT, FAN, FL-Inv
P5V
5
No
No
No
E5V
M5V
5
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes / No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
ICH7-M, USB Power
LED
5
MCV
5
5
PSC
Yes
SND-P5V
A4R7-P4V
R3V
No
AN12941A
4.7
No
No
AD1981HD, AN12941A
ICH7-M (RTC)
2.0 -3.5
Yes
Yes
1-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.7 Batteries
1 Hardware Overview
1.7 Batteries
The computer has two types of batteries as follows:
‰
‰
Main battery
Real Time Clock (RTC) battery
The battery specifications are listed in Table 1-7.
Table 1-7 Battery specifications
Battery name
G71C0004G710
Material
Li-Ion
Output voltage
Capacity
4,700 mAh
15 mAh
Main battery
RTC battery
10.8 V
2.4 V
G71C0004G810
GDM710000041
Ni-MH
1.7.1
Main Battery
The removable main battery pack is the computer’s main power source when the AC adaptor
is not attached. The main battery maintains the state of the computer when the computer
enters in resume mode.
‰ Battery Charge
When the AC adapter is connected, normal charging is used while the system is turned on
and quick charge is used while the system is turned off. Table 1-8 lists the charging time
required for charges.
Table 1-8 Time required for charges
Battery type
Power on (hours)
Power off (hours)
Main battery (4,700 mAh)
About 5.5 to 12.0
About 3.0
Charge is stopped in the following cases.
1. The main battery is fully charged.
2. The main battery is removed.
3. Main battery or AC adapter voltage is abnormal.
4. Charging current is abnormal.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.7 Batteries
‰ Data preservation time
When turning off the power in being charged fully, the preservation time is as following
Table 1-9.
Table 1-9 Data preservation time
Battery type
Standby mode
Boot mode
Main battery (4,700 mAh)
6 days
60 days
1.7.2 RTC battery
The RTC battery provides power to keep the current date, time and other setup information
in memory while the computer is turned off. Table 1-10 lists the charging time and data
preservation period of the RTC battery.
Table 1-10 RTC battery charging/data preservation time
Status
Time
Charging Time (power on)
8 hours
30 days
Data preservation period (full charge)
1-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.8 AC Adapter
1 Hardware Overview
1.8 AC Adapter
The AC adapter is used to charge the battery.
Table 1-11 lists the AC adapter specifications.
Table 1-11 AC adapter specifications
Parameter
Specification
G71C0002SC10
G71C0004A510
Power
60W (Peak 75W)
100V/240V
Input voltage
Input frequency
Input current
50Hz to 60Hz
1.5A or less (100V-240V 4Aload)
15V
Output voltage
Output current
0A to 4A (At constant voltage mode)
Parameter
Specification
G71C00043310
G71C00049510
Power
75W (Peak 90W)
100V/240V
Input voltage
Input frequency
Input current
Output voltage
Output current
50Hz to 60Hz
1.5A or less (100V-240V)
15V
0A to 5A (At constant voltage mode)
5A to 6A (At surge load mode)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.8 AC Adapter
1-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Troubleshooting Procedures
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2-ii
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Chapter 2
Contents
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................2-1
Troubleshooting Flowchart ........................................................................................2-3
Power Supply Troubleshooting ..................................................................................2-7
System Board Troubleshooting ................................................................................2-19
USB FDD Troubleshooting......................................................................................2-36
HDD Troubleshooting..............................................................................................2-39
Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting ..............................................................2-44
Display Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................2-47
Optical Drive Troubleshooting.................................................................................2-49
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................2-51
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................2-53
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting.......................................................................................2-54
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting ...............................................................................2-56
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting ............................................................................................2-58
2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting..........................................................................2-61
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting .........................................................................2-62
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Figures
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart ..................................................................................2-4
Figure 2-2 A set of tool for debug port test.........................................................................2-22
Tables
Table 2-1 Battery icon..........................................................................................................2-7
Table 2-2 DC IN icon...........................................................................................................2-8
Table 2-3 Error code ..........................................................................................................2-10
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status.................................................................2-23
Table 2-5 FDD error code and status.................................................................................2-37
Table 2-6 HDD error code and status ................................................................................2-42
2-iv
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1 Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2
2.1 Troubleshooting
Chapter 2 describes how to determine if a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) in the computer is
causing the computer to malfunction. The FRUs covered are:
1. Power Supply
2. System Board
3. USB Floppy Disk Drive 8. Modem
6. Display
7. Optical Drive
11. Wireless LAN
12. Sound components
13. Bridge media Slot
14. Fingerprint sensor
4. Hard Disk Drive
9. LAN
5. Keyboard/Touch pad
10. Bluetooth
The Test Program operations are described in Chapter 3. Detailed replacement procedures
are described in Chapter 4.
NOTE: Before replacing the system board, it is necessary to execute the subtest 03 DMI
Information save of the 3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration in Chapter 3.
After replacing the system board, it is necessary to execute the subtest 04 DMI
Information recovery and subtest 08 System configuration display of the 3.3
Setting of the hardware configuration in Chapter 3.
Also update with the latest EC/KBC as described in Appendix H “EC/KBC
Rewrite Procedures”.
The implement for the Diagnostics procedures is referred to Chapter 3. Also, following
implements are necessary:
1. Phillips screwdrivers (For replacement procedures, Refer to Chapter 4)
2. Implements for debugging port check
• Toshiba MS-DOS system FD
• RS-232C cross cable
• Test board with debug port test cable
• PC for displaying debug port test result
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.1 Troubleshooting
There are following two types of connections in the figure of board and module connection
in and after 2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting.
(1) Cable connection is described in the figure as line.
(2) Pin connection is described in the figure as arrow.
<e.g> Connection of modem
2-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
Use the flowchart in Figure 2-1 as a guide for determining which FRU malfunctions. Before
going through the flowchart steps, check the following:
‰ Ask the user if a password is registered and, if it is, ask him or her to enter the
password.
‰ Make sure that Windows® XP preinstalled by Toshiba is installed on the hard disk.
Operating systems not preinstalled by Toshiba can cause the computer malfunction.
‰ Make sure all optional equipment is removed from the computer.
‰ Make sure the USB FDD and optical drive are empty.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (1/2)
2-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (2/2)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
If the diagnostics program cannot detect an error, the problem may be intermittent. The
Running Test program should be executed several times to isolate the problem. Check the
Log Utilities function to confirm which diagnostic test detected an error, then perform the
appropriate troubleshooting procedures as follows:
1. If an error is detected on the system test, memory test, display test, CD-ROM/DVD-
ROM test, expansion test, real timer test, Sound/LAN/Modem test, Bluetooth test or
IEEE1394 test, perform the System Board Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.4.
2. If an error is detected on the floppy disk test, perform the USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.5.
3. If an error is detected on the hard disk test, perform the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
4. If an error is detected on the keyboard test (DIAGNOSTICS TEST) and pressed key
display test (ONLY ONE TEST), perform the Keyboard/Touch pad Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.7.
5. If an error is detected on the display test, perform the Display Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.8.
6. If an error is detected on the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, perform the Optical Drive
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.9.
7. If an error is detected on the modem test, perform the Modem Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.10.
8. If an error is detected on the LAN test, perform the LAN Troubleshooting Procedures
in Section 2.11.
9. If an error is detected on the Bluetooth test, perform the Bluetooth Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.12.
10. If an error is detected on the Wireless LAN test, perform the Wireless LAN
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.13.
11. If an error is detected on the Sound test, perform the Sound Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.14.
12. If a malfunction is detected on Bridge media, perform the Bridge media slot
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.15.
13. If a malfunction is detected on Fingerprint sensor, perform the Fingerprint sensor
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.16.
2-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
The power supply controls many functions and components. To determine if the power
supply is functioning properly, start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other Procedures
as instructed. The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Icons in the LCD Check
Procedure 2: Error Code Check
Procedure 3: Connection Check
Procedure 4: Charge Check
Procedure 5: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Icons in the LCD Check
The following Icons in the LCD indicate the power supply status:
‰ Battery icon
‰ DC IN icon
The Power Supply Controller (PSC) displays the power supply status through the Battery
icon and the DC IN icon in the LCD as listed in the tables below. To check the power supply
status, install a battery pack and connect an AC adaptor.
Table 2-1 Battery icon
Battery icon
Lights orange
Power supply status
Battery is charged and the external DC is input. It has no
relation with ON/OFF of the system power.
Lights Blue
Battery is fully charged and the external DC is input. It has
no relation with ON/OFF of the system power.
Blinks orange
The battery level is low while the system power is ON.
(even intervals)
Blinks orange once
(at being switched on)
The system is driven by only a battery and the battery level
is low.
Doesn’t light
Any condition other than those above.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Table 2-2 DC IN icon
DC IN icon
Power supply status
Lights Blue
DC power is being supplied from the AC adapter.
There is a problem with the power supply. *1
Any condition other than those above.
Flashes orange
Doesn’t light
*1 When the Power Supply Controller (PSC) detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon blinks
orange. It shows an error code.
When the icon is blinking, perform the following procedure.
1. Remove the battery pack and the AC adapter.
2. Re-attach the battery pack and the AC adapter.
If the icon is still blinking after the operation above, check the followings:
Check 1 If the DC IN icon blinks orange, go to Procedure 2.
Check 2 If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 3.
Check 3 If the battery icon does not light orange or blue, go to Procedure 4.
NOTE: Use a supplied AC adapter G71C0002SC10, G71C00043310 (2-pin)/
G71C0004A510, G71C00049510 (3-pin).
2-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Error Code Check
If the power supply microprocessor detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon blinks orange. The
blink pattern indicates an error as shown below.
‰ Start
Off for 2 seconds
‰ Error code (8 bit)
“1”
“0”
On for one second
On for half second
Interval between data bits
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Example: Error code 11h (Error codes are given in hexadecimal format.)
Off for half second
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Check 1 Convert the DC IN icon blink pattern into the hexadecimal error code and compare
it to the tables below. Then go to Check 2.
Table 2-3 Error code
Error code
Where Error occurs
AC Adaptor
1st Battery
1*h
2*h
3*h
2nd Battery
S3V output
4*h
5*h
6*h
7*h
8*h
9*h
A*h
B*h
C*h
D*h
E*h
F*h
E5V output
E3V output
1R5-E1V output
1R8-B1V output
PPV output
PTV output
1R5-E1V output
1R8-B1V output
PPV output
PTV output
-
2-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Compare the patterns in the hexadecimal error code to the tables below.
‰ AC Adaptor
Error code
10h
Meaning
AC Adaptor output voltage is over 16.5V.
11h
CommonDock voltage is over 16.5V.
12h
Current from the DC power supply is over 7.00A.
Current from the DC power supply is over 0.5A when there is no load.
Correction value of 0[A] is out of designed value.
13h
14h
‰ 1st Battery
Error code
22h
Meaning
1st battery discharge current over 0.5A when there is no load.
1st battery charge current is over 3.9A in charging.
Correction value of 0[A] is out of designed value.
1st battery charge current is over 0.3A in not charging.
23h
24h
25h
‰ 2nd Battery
Error code
32h
Meaning
2nd battery discharge current is over 0.5A when there is no load.
2nd battery charge current is over 3.9A in charging.
Correction value of 0[A] is out of designed value.
2nd battery charge current is over 0.3A in not charging.
33h
34h
35h
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
‰ S3V output
Error code
Meaning
40h
45h
46h
S3V voltage is 3.47V or less when the computer is powered on/off.
S3V voltage is under 3.14V in normal conditions.
S3V voltage is under 3.14V when the computer is booting up.
‰ E5V output
Error code
Meaning
50h
51h
52h
54h
E5V voltage is over 6.00V when the computer is powered on/off.
E5V voltage is under 4.50V when the computer is powered on.
E5V voltage is under 4.50V when the computer is booting up.
E5V voltage is under 4.50V when EV power is maintained.
‰ E3V output
Error code
Meaning
60h
61h
62h
64h
E3V voltage is over 3.96V when the computer is powered on/off.
E3V voltage is under 2.81V when the computer is powered on.
E3V voltage is under 2.81V when the computer is booting up.
E3V voltage is under 2.81 V when EV power is maintained.
‰ 1R5-E1V output
Error code
70h
Meaning
1R5-E1V voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when the computer is powered on.
1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when the computer is booting up.
1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when EV power is maintained.
71h
72h
74h
2-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
‰ 1R8-B1V output
Error code
Meaning
80h
81h
82h
84h
1R8-B1V voltage is over 2.16V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when the computer is powered on.
1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when the computer is booting up.
1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when BV power is maintained.
‰ PPV output
Error code
90h
Meaning
PPV voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.
PPV voltage is under 0.32V when the computer is powered on.
PPV voltage is under 0.32V when the computer is booting up.
91h
92h
‰ PTV output
Error code
A0h
Meaning
PTV voltage is over 1.26V when the computer is powered on/off.
PTV voltage is under 0.89V when the computer is powered on.
PTV voltage is under 0.89V when the computer is booting up.
A1h
A2h
‰ 1R5-E1V output
Error code
B0h
Meaning
1R5-E1V voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when the computer is powered on.
1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when the computer is booting up.
1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when EV power is maintained.
B1h
B2h
B3h
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
‰ 1R8-B1V output
Error code
Meaning
C0h
C1h
C2h
C4h
1R8-B1V voltage is over 2.16V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when the computer is powered on.
1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when the computer is booting up.
1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when BV power is maintained.
‰ PPV output
Error code
D0h
Meaning
PPV voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.
PPV voltage is under 0.32V when the computer is powered on.
PPV voltage is under 0.32V when the computer is booting up.
D1h
D2h
‰ PTV output
Error code
E0h
Meaning
PTV voltage is over 1.26V when the computer is powered on/off.
PTV voltage is under 0.89V when the computer is powered on.
PTV voltage is under 0.89V when the computer is booting up.
E1h
E2h
‰ Miscellaneous
Error code
Meaning
F0h
The sub clock does not oscillate.
2-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Check 2 In the case of error code 10h or 12h:
‰ Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into
the DC IN 15 V socket and wall outlet. If the cables are connected correctly,
go to the following step:
‰ Connect a new AC adaptor and/or AC power cord, if necessary. If the error
still exists, go to Procedure 5.
Check 3 In the case of error code 22h to 25h:
‰ Make sure the battery pack is correctly installed in the computer. If the
battery pack is correctly installed, go to the following step:
‰ Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the error still exists, go to
Procedure 5.
Check 4 For any other error, go to Procedure 5.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Connection Check
The power supply wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connectors may be disconnected. Perform Check 1.
Check 1 Disconnect the AC power cord from the wall outlet. Check the power cable for
breaks. If the power cord is damaged, connect a new AC power cord. If there is
no damage, go to Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the
DC-IN jack socket and AC adaptor inlet/wall outlet, respectively. If these cables
are connected correctly, go to Check 3.
Check 3 Make sure the DC IN jack is firmly connected to the connector CN8800 on the
system board.
• If the DC IN jack is not firmly connected, go to Procedure 5.
• If it is connected, go to Check 4.
Check 4 Use a multimeter to make sure the AC adaptor output voltage is close to 15 V. If
the output is several percent lower than 15 V, go to Check 5. If the output is close
to 15 V, go to Check 6.
Check 5 Connect a new AC adaptor or AC power cord.
• If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 5.
• If the battery icon does not light, go to Check 6.
Check 6 Make sure the battery pack is installed in the computer correctly. If the battery is
properly installed and the battery icon still does not light, go to Procedure 4.
2-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 4
Charge Check
Check 1 Make sure the AC adaptor and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC IN
socket and the wall outlet. If these cables are connected correctly, replace the AC
adaptor (and/or AC power cord, if necessary).
Check 2 Make sure the battery is properly installed. If the battery is properly installed, go
to Check 3.
Check 3 The battery pack may be completely discharged. Wait a few minutes to charge the
battery pack. If the battery pack is still not charged, go to Check 4.
Check 4 The battery’s temperature is too hot or cold. Return the temperature to a normal
operating condition. If the battery pack still is not charged, go to Check 5.
Check 5 Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the battery pack still is not charged,
go to Procedure 5.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Procedure 5
Replacement Check
The system board processor module may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the
computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. Check the
connection between the AC adaptor and system board and connection. After checking the
connections, perform the following Check 1:
When AC adapter is connected:
Check 1 AC adapter may be faulty. Replace the AC adapter with a new one. If the problem
still occurs, perform Check 2.
Check 2 System board may be faulty. Replace the system board with a new one.
When AC adapter is not connected:
(When driving with battery pack)
Check 1 Battery pack may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 2.
Check 2 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one.
2-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the system board and CPU are defective or not
functioning properly. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
instructed.
The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Message Check
Procedure 2: Debugging Port Check (Boot Mode)
Procedure 3: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Procedure 1
Message Check
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. The IRT tests each IC on the system board and initializes it.
‰ If an error message is shown on the display, perform Check 1.
‰ If there is no error message, go to Procedure 2.
‰ If Toshiba MS-DOS or Windows XP is properly loaded, go to Procedure 3.
Check 1 If one of the following error messages appears on the screen, press F1 as the
message instructs. These errors occur when the system configuration preserved in
the RTC memory (CMOS type memory) is not the same as the actual
configuration or when the data is lost.
If you press F1 as the message instructs, returns all system settings to their default
values. Then the system reboots.
If error message (b) appears often when the power is turned on, replace the RTC
battery. If any other error message displays, perform Check 2.
(a) *** Bad HDD type ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(b) *** RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is
inconsistent ***
Press [F1] key to set Date/Time ......
(c) *** Bad configuration ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(d) *** Bad memory size ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(e) *** Bad time function ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(g) *** Bad check sum (ROM) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
Check 2 If the following error message is displayed on the screen, press any key as the
message instructs.
The following error message appears when data stored in RAM under the resume
function is lost because the battery has become discharged or the system board is
damaged. Go to Procedure 3.
WARNING: RESUME FAILURE.
PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
If any other error message displays, perform Check 3.
2-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Check 3 The IRT checks the system board. When the IRT detects an error, the system
stops or an error message appears.
If one of the following error messages (1) through (15), (20) or (21) appears, go to
Procedure 4.
If the error message (16) appears, go to the Keyboard Troubleshooting Procedures
in Section 2.7.
If the error message (17) or (18) appears, go to the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
If the error message (19) appears, go to the Optical Drive Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.9.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
PIT ERROR
MEMORY REFRESH ERROR
TIMER CH.2 OUT ERROR
FIRST 64KB MEMORY ERROR
FIRST 64KB MEMORY PARITY ERROR
VRAM ERROR
SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR
SYSTEM MEMORY PARITY ERROR
MEMORY ERROR
(10) EXTENDED MEMORY PARITY ERROR
(11) DMA PAGE REGISTER ERROR
(12) DMAC #1 ERROR
(13) DMAC #2 ERROR
(14) PIC #1 ERROR
(15) PIC #2 ERROR
(16) KBC ERROR
(17) HDC ERROR
(18) Built-in HDD ERROR
(19) CD-ROM ERROR
(20) TIMER INTERRUPT ERROR
(21) RTC UPDATE ERROR
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Debugging Port Check (Boot Mode)
Check the D port status by a debug port test. The tool for debug port test is shown below.
Figure 2-1 A set of tool for debug port test
The test procedures are follows:
1. Connect the debug port test cable to the connector CN3490 of the system board. For
disassembling to connect the test cable, refer to Chapter 4.
2. Connect the debug port test cable and RS-232C cross-cable to the test board.
3. Connect the RS-232C Cross-cable to the PC that displays the test results.
4. Boot the computer in MS-DOS mode.
5. Execute GETDPORT.COM in the text menu in CPU REAL mode. (Insert the FD for
starting D port into FDD and input “FD starting drive:>dport”.)
The D port status is displayed in the following form;
6. When the D port status is FFFFh (normal status), go to Procedure 4.
When the D port status falls into any status in Table 2-4, execute Check 1.
2-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (1/10)
D port status
Inspection items
Details
Boot block
Permission of A20 and Clear of
software reset bit
Prohibition of APIC
Initialization of MCH and ICH
Initialization of Super I/O
Initialization of debug port
Dummy read of 3rd Bus data
Setting of printer port
F000H
BTBK_START
Only PIT CH0 initialization
(for HOLD_ON)
BIOS rewrite factor flag initialization
CHECK SUM CHECK
Transition to protected mode
Boot block checksum (skip when returned to S3)
(halts when error)
Checksum other than boot block (skip when
returned to S3)
F001H
BTBK_CALC_CHKSUM_END
EC/KBC rewrite check
If “rewrite” is requested, go to “BIOS rewrite
process”
Key input
When a key is pressed, check if it is
Tilde key or Tab key
F002H
BTBK_INI_SC_START
Initialization of SC
F003H
F004H
F005H
BTBK_INI_SC_ERR
BTBK_SC_HW_FAILURE
BTBK_INI_KBC_END
BIOS rewrite request check
If Checksum check error occurred on except
Boot Block or rewrite is required by user, go to
“BIOS rewrite process”.
F006H
F007H
BTBK_ENTER_CHK_BIOS_SIGN
BIOS signature check
BTBK_ENTER_SYSTEM_BIOS
Transits to System BIOS IRT
BIOS rewrite process
Initialization of ICHM. D31
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (2/10)
D port status
Inspection items
Details
(F007H)
DRAM configuration
Permission of cache (L1 cache only)
Memory clear
F008H
BTBK_INI_MEM_END
Transition to real mode and copy of
BIOS to RAM
F009H
F00AH
BTBK_CHG_RAM_BIOS
Saving key scan code
BTBK_INI_VGA_END
Controlling fan
Initializing sound items
(for BEEP)
Permission of system speaker
Releasing mute
Making the volume max (model that can control
volume)
When request BIOS, EC/KBC
rewriting
Blinks green (cycle:2s, on:1s, off:1s)
F00BH
BTBK_CANT_UPDATE_BIOS
When BIOS renewal is prohibited
Key input
Blinks orange (cycle: 2s(On:1s,Off:1s))
Prohibition of USB
BEEP
Waiting for key input
FDC reset
Reading CHGBIOSA.EXE /
CHGFIRMA.EXE
Setting parameters for 2HD(1.44MB)
Reading of first sector, If it is the data of 1.44MB
(2HD), the media type is definite.
Setting of parameters for 2DD (720KB)
Retrieval of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” from the root
directory.
Directory start header and calculates the sector
Read 1 sector of the root directory
Retrieval of entry of “CHGBIOSA.EXE”
/“CHGFIRMA.EXE” from the sector read.
Reading of EXE header of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” and
“CHGFIRMA.EXE” Key input when error occurred
Execution of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” and
“CHGFIRMA.EXE”
2-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (3/10)
D port status
Inspection items
IRT_START
Details
F100H
Process of cache control for
HyperThreading
Prohibition of cache
Initialization of H/W (before DRAM
recognition)
Initialization of MCHM
Initialization of ICH4M.D31.Func0
Initialization of ICH4M.D31.Func1
Initialization of USB.Func0,1,2,7
Initialization of ICH4M.D31.Func3
Initialization of ICH4M.D31.Func5
Initialization of FLUTE
Initialization of PIT channel 1
IRT_INI_SPREG_END
(Setting the refresh interval to “30μs”)
F101H
F102H
Check of DRAM type and size
(at cold boot)
When unsupported memory is connected,
becoming HLT after beep sound (HLT when
DRAM size is 0)
SM-RAM stack area test
Cache configuration
HLT When it can not be used as a stack
Cache permission (L1/L2 Cache)
CMOS access test (at cold boot)
(HLT when an error is detected)
Battery level check of CMOS
CMOS checksum check
Initialization of CMOS data (1)
(Setting of boot status and IRT busy flag, The rest
bits are 0)
Setting of IRT status
Storing DRAM size in CMOS
Cache configuration
F103H
IRT_RSM_BRANCH
Resume branch (at cold boot)
Not resume when a CMOS error occurred
Not resume when resume status code is not set
Resume error check
S3 returning error (ICH)
Resume error F170 RSM_UNKNOWN_ERR
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (4/10)
D port status
Inspection items
Details
SM-RAM checksum check
(F103)
Resume error F173H RSM_SMRAM_ERR
Check of memory configuration change
Resume error F174H RSM_SYSMEM_ERR
RAM area checksum check in system BIOS
Resume error F179H SM_RAMBIOS_ERR
Expansion memory checksum check
Resume error F176H RSM_EXTMEM_ERR
PnP RAM checksum check
Resume error F177H RSM_PNPRAM_ERR
Transition to RESUME-MAIN
Resume error process
Reset of CPU clock to low
Prohibition of all SMI
Clearance of resume status
Return to ROM
Turning area of C0000h to EFFFFh to PCI
(Prohibition of DRAM)
Setting of resume error request
Copying ROM/RAM of system BIOS (HLT, when error occurs)
IRT_BIOS_SIGN_CHK
F104H
F105H
Check of BIOS signature
(At COLD Boot)
IRT_CHG_RAM_BIOS_END
SMRAM initialization
Check of CPU for HyperThreading
Microcode update
APIC initialization
WakeUp factor check
SMRAM base rewriting and CPU
state map saving for BIOS
Permission of SMI based on ASMI
2-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (5/10)
D port status
Inspection items
Details
F106H
IRT_INI_SMBASE_END
Initialization of devices which
need initialization before PCI bus
initialization
PIT test (Cold boot only) and initialization
Setting of test pattern to channel 0 of PIT#0
Check whether the set test pattern can be read
Initialization of PIT channel 0
(Setting of timer interruption interval to 55ms)
Initialization of PIT channel 2
(Setting of the sound generator frequency to 664Hz)
Test of PIT channel 1
(Check whether the refresh signal works normally in
30 micro-s refresh interval) HLT, when the time is out
Test of PIT channel 2
(Check whether the speaker gate works normally)
CPU clock measurement
Check of parameter block A
Permission of SMI except auto-off function
Control of excess of rated input power
Battery discharging current control (1CmA)
AC adapter rated over current control
Dividing procedures for time measuring by IRT
Setting for clock generator
CPU Initialization
Judgment of CPU type
Check of supporting Geyserville
Make CPU clock High
Setting of Graphics Aperture Size
F107H
IRT_CHK_INI_SYS1_END
Saving memory configuration to
buffer
Reading of EC version
Update of flash ROM type
Judging of destination (Japan or
other than Japan) based on DMI
data
Sets default setting if bad battery or bad checksum
(ROM, CMOS) is detected
CMOS default setting check
ACPI table initialization
(for execution of option ROM)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (6/10)
D port status
Inspection items
Details
(F107H)
Initialization of devices which need
initialization before PCI bus
initialization
AC97’ control
Initialization of temperature control information
KBC initialization
VGA display off, Reset control
Sound initialization
PC multi-box status acquisition
HC initialization, USB device connection
recognition and initialization
Control of built-in LAN permission/prohibition
PIC initialization
PIC test
Password Initialization
IRT_CHK_INI_SYS2_END
PCI bus initialization
Initialization of LAN information
Check of WakeUp factor
IRT_INI_PCI_END
F108H
F109H
(connection of DS Bus)
Task generation for waiting
INIT_PCI completion
CMOS data initialization (2)
PnP initialization
Setting of setup items
Waiting for the completion of Multi-
box status check
H/W setting based on resource
IRT_MK_SYSRES_END
F10AH
Task generation for waiting PnP
resource making completion
Control of serial interrupt (Execute
before using interrupt)
PnP H/W initialization
PC card slot initialization
SIO initialization (for models supporting SIO)
FIR initialization (for models supporting FIR)
Making of work for automatic configuration
Acquisition of PCI IRQ
PCI automatic configuration
2-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (7/10)
D port status
Inspection items
Details
(F10AH)
Configuration
Saving of VGA configuration result
F10BH
IRT_PCI_CONF_END
Task generation for waiting PCI_CONFIGURATION
completion
Initialization of H/W needed after
PCI configuration
Printer port setting (for models supporting printer)
HDD initialization sequence start
FDD initialization sequence start (for models
supporting printer internal FDD)
Enabling power off
Output code generation
IRT_CHK_INI_SYS3_END
FIRST_64KB_CHECK
IRT_CHK_F64KB_END
INIT_INT_VECTOR
IRT_INI_VECT_END
INIT_NDP
F10CH
F10DH
F10EH
F10FH
(Check of first 64KB memory)
(Initialization of vectors)
(Initialization of NDP)
IRT_INI_NDP_END
INIT_SYSTEM
(Initialization of system)
Storing of CMOS error status to
IRT_ERR_STS_BUF
Timer initialization start
EC initialization & Reading of battery information
Update of system BIOS (Update of EDID information
for LCD)
F110H
F111H
IRT_INI_SYS_END
INIT_DISPLAY
(Waiting for VGA chip initialization completion, VGA
BIOS initialization)
IRT_VGA_POST_START
VGA POST
F112H
F113H
IRT_VGA_POST_END
IRT_INI_DISP_END
DISP_LOGO
(Displaying logo)
F114H
IRT_DISP_LOGO_END
SYS_MEM_CHECK
(Check of convention memory)(Boot)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (8/10)
D port status
Inspection items
IRT_SYSMEM_CHK_END
EXT_MEM_CHECK
Details
F115H
(Check of exception in the protected mode)(Boot)
F116H
IRT_EXTMEM_CHK_END
Exception check in the protected
mode
Dport=F117h when error occurs
INIT_SYS_MEM
Initialization of conventional memory (Reboot)
F118H
F119H
F11AH
F11BH
IRT_INI_SYSMEM_END
CHK_DMA_PAGE
IRT_DMA_PAGE_END
CHECK_DMAC
(Check of DMA Page Register) (Boot)
(Initialization of DMAC) (Boot)
(Initialization of DMA) (Boot)
IRT_CHK_DMAC_END
INIT_DMAC
IRT_INI_DMAC_END
CHECK_PRT
(Check of printer existence) (For models supporting
Printer port)
IRT_CHK_PRT_END
CHECK_SIO
F11CH
F11DH
(Check of SIO) (model supporting SIO)
IRT_CHK_SIO_END
BOOT_PASSWORD
(Check of password)
Waiting for FDD initialization completion
(In the case of “Reboot”)
Waiting for HDD initialization completion
Check of key input during IRT (waiting for KBC
initialization completion)
Initialization of ATA priority
(In the case of “Boot”)
BM loading process (for models supporting
fingerprint authentication)
Initialization of BM (for models supporting
fingerprint authentication)
Check of key input during IRT (waiting for KBC
initialization completion)
Input of password
BM releasing (for models supporting fingerprint
authentication)
2-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (9/10)
D port status
Inspection items
IRT_WAIT_SMI_SEQ_END
IRT_PASSWORD_END
EX_IO_ROM_CHECK
Details
F11EH
F11FH
(Check of option I/O ROM)
F120H
IRT_EX_IO_ROM_END
PRE_BOOT_SETUP
Saving of value in 40:00h
(for SIO saving/restoring)
Setting of font address for resume password
Setting of repeat parameter for USB KB
Final check of key input during IRT
Storing of T_SHADOW_RAM_SIZE
Update of system resource just before booting
Rewriting of memory map data of INT15h E820h
function
Waiting for AC-Link initialization completion
Renewal of table for DMI
Copying ACPI table to uppermost of extension
memory
Waiting for completion of setting clock generator
When error occurred, halt at F121
IRT_CLOCK_GENERATOR_ERR
Waiting for completion of initialization of Serial
port (for models supporting SIO)
Cancel of NMI Mask
TIT check sum
Clear of the IRT flag of Runtime side
Update of check sum of Runtime side
Hibernation branch (for models supporting BIOS
Hibernation)
Initialization of Bluetooth (for models supporting
Bluetooth)
Check for existence of target maintenance card
Prohibition of unused PC card not used
Setting Wakeup status data for ACPI
HW initialization just before booting, Waiting for
initialization completion
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (10/10)
D port status
F122H
Inspection items
Details
IRT_SC_INIT_START
F123H
Notifies the DVI connection status to VGA BIOS (for
models supporting DVI)
Setting of battery save mode
Setting of date
Waiting for Bluetooth initialization completion
(for models supporting Bluetooth)
Update of DMI Wakeup factor, Update of SM-BIOS
structure table
PCI device configuration space close
Cache control
Renewal of parameter block A
Process for CPU
Make the CPU clock to be set by SETUP
Waiting of motor-off completion of disabled HDD
Final decision of USB FDD drive information
Post processing of PRE_BOOT_SETUP
Clear of PWRBTN_STS
Enabling POWER Button
F124H
F125H
IRT_PRE_BOOT_SETUP_END
IRT_WAIT_DISP_LOGO_START
Clear of IRT status
Renewal of check sum of
Runtime side
FFFFH
IRT_POST_END
NOTE: Status outputted by the test means the last error detected in the debug port test.
2-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Check 1 If the D port status F11DH or F120H is displayed, go to HDD Trouble shooting
Procedure in Section 2.6.
Check 2 If any other D port status error code is displayed, perform Procedure 3.
D port error code is as follows:
Error code
F117H
Contents
Exception check error
Clock generator error
F121H
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the following tests from the Diagnostic Test Menu. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform these tests.
1. System test
2. Memory test
3. Keyboard test
4. Display test
5. Floppy Disk test
6. Async test
7. Hard Disk test
8. Real Timer test
9. NDP test
10. Expansion test
11. CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test
12. Only One test
13. Wireless LAN test
14. Sound test
15. LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
If an error is detected during these tests, go to Procedure 4.
2-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 4
Replacement Check
The system board connectors may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform Check 1.
Check 1 Visually check for the following:
a) Cracked or broken connector housing
b) Damaged connector pins
If their connectors are in good condition, but there is still a problem, go to Check
2.
Check 2 The system board may be damaged. Replace the system board with a new one
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the USB FDD is functioning properly. Perform
the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as
required.
Procedure 1: USB FDD Head Cleaning Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
USB FDD Head Cleaning Check
USB FDD head cleaning operation details are given in Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics.
Connect a USB floppy disk drive to a computer and insert the Diagnostics Disk in the USB
floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the test. Clean the USB FDD heads using the
cleaning kit. If the USB FDD still does not function properly after cleaning, go to Procedure
2.
If the test program cannot be executed, go to Procedure 3.
2-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the USB FDD, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to
Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the diagnostics test procedures.
Floppy disk drive test error codes and their status names are listed in Table 2-5. Make sure
the floppy disk is formatted correctly and that the write protect tab is disabled. If any other
errors occur while executing the FDD diagnostics test, go to Check 1.
Table 2-5 FDD error code and status
Code
01h
02h
03h
04h
06h
08h
09h
10h
20h
40h
60h
80h
EEh
FFh
Status
Bad command error
Address mark not found
Write protected
Record not found
Media removed
DMA overrun error
DMA boundary error
CRC error
FDC error
Seek error
Not drive error
Time out error
Write buffer error
Data compare error
Check 1 If the following message appears, disable the write protect tab on the floppy disk.
If any other message appears, perform Check 2.
Write protected
Check 2 Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly. If it is, go to Procedure 3.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The USB FDD is connected to the System Board.
Check 1 When using the USB port, make sure the USB FDD cable is firmly connected to
CN4612 or CN4614 on the System.
If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 2.
If any of the connections is damaged, or there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The USB FDD or USB FDD cable may be defective or damaged. Replace it with
a new one. If the USB FDD is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 Replace the System board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.
2-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the HDD is functioning properly. Perform the
steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Partition Check
Procedure 2: Message Check
Procedure 3: Format Check
Procedure 4: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 5: Connector Check and Replacement Check
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when you execute the HDD
troubleshooting procedures. Transfer the contents of the hard disk to floppy
disks or other storage media.
Procedure 1
Partition Check
Insert the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk and restart the computer with U key holding down.
Perform the following checks:
Check 1 Type C:and press Enter. If you cannot change to drive C, go to Check 2. If you
can change to drive C, go to Check 3.
Check 2 Type FDISKand press Enter. Choose Display Partition Information from the
FDISK menu. If drive C is listed, go to Check 3. If drive C is not listed, return to
the FDISK menu and choose the option to create a DOS partition on drive C.
Restart the computer from the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk. If the problem still
exists, go to Procedure 2.
Check 3 If drive C is listed as active in the FDISK menu, go to Check 4. If drive C is not
listed as active, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to set the active
partition for drive C. Restart the computer and then go to Procedure 2.
Check 4 Remove the FD and restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to
Procedure 3.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Message Check
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. When the test detects an error, an error message is displayed on the
screen.
Make sure no floppy disk is in the USB FDD. Turn on the computer and check the message
on the screen. When an OS starts from the 2.5” HDD, go to Procedure 3. Otherwise, start
with Check 1 below and perform the other checks as instructed.
Check 1 If any of the following messages appear, go to Procedure 3. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 2.
Built-in HDD ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)
or
CD-ROM ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)
Check 2 If either of the following messages appears, go to Check 3. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 4.
Insert system disk in drive
Press any key when ready .....
or
Non-System disk or disk error
Replace and press any key when ready
Check 3 Using the SYS command of the MS-DOS, transfer the system to the 2.5” HDD. If
the system is not transferred, go to Procedure 3. Refer to the MS-DOS Manual for
detailed operation.
If the following message appears on the display, the system program has been
transferred to the HDD.
System Transferred
If an error message appears on the display, perform Check 4.
Check 4 2.5” HDD(s) and the connector(s) of system board may be defective (Refer to the
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures for disassembling.). Insert
HDD(s) to the connector(s) firmly. If it is (or they are) firmly connected, go to
Procedure 3.
2-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Format Check
The computer’s HDD is formatted using the MS-DOS FORMAT program or the physical
format program of the test program. To format the HDD, start with Check 1 below and
perform the other steps as required.
Refer to the MS-DOS Manual for the operation of MS-DOS. For the format by the test
program, refer to the Chapter 3.
Check 1 Format the 2.5” HDD using MS-DOS FORMAT command. Type as FORMAT
C: / S/U.
If the 2.5” HDD can not be formatted, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Using the MS-DOS FDISK command, set the 2.5” HDD partition. If the partition
is not set, go to Check 3. If it is set, format the 2.5” HDD using MS-DOS
FORMAT command.
Check 3 Using the Diagnostic Disk, format the 2.5” HDD with a format option (physical
format). If HDD is formatted, set the 2.5” HDD partition using MS-DOS FDISK
command.
If you cannot format the 2.5” HDD using the Tests and Diagnostic program, go to
Procedure 4.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 4
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The HDD test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk. Perform all of the HDD tests in the
Hard Disk Drive Test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about
the HDD test program.
If an error is detected during the HDD test, an error code and status will be displayed.
Replace the HDD with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures. The error codes and statuses are listed in Table 2-6. If an error code is not
generated or the problem still exists, go to Procedure 5.
Table 2-6 HDD error code and status
Code
01h
02h
04h
05h
07h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
10h
11h
12h
20h
40h
80h
AAh
BBh
CCh
E0h
EEh
DAh
Status
Bad command error
Address mark not found
Record not found
HDC not reset
Drive not initialized
Overrun error (DRQ)
DMA boundary error
Bad sector error
Bad track error
ECC error
ECC recover enable
DMA CRC error
HDC error
Seek error
Time out error
Drive not ready
Undefined error
Write fault
Status error
Access time error
No HDD
2-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 5
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The HDD may be disconnected, or the HDD, HDD cable or system board may be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the HDD is firmly connected to CN1850 on the system board.
If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If
there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The HDD may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists, perform Check
3.
Check 3 The System board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting
2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting
To determine if the computer’s keyboard or touch pad is functioning properly, perform the
following procedures. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the Keyboard Test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform the test program.
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, the keyboard is functioning
properly.
2-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The keyboard, touch pad or sensor/switch board may be disconnected or damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, and perform the following checks:
1. If the keyboard malfunctions, start with Check 1.
2. If the touch pad malfunctions, start with Check 3.
3. If the SW membrane malfunctions, start with Check 6.
Check 1 Make sure the keyboard cable is securely connected to CN3230 on the system
board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly. If there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The keyboard or its cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following
the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 8.
Check 3 Make sure the touch pad cable is firmly connected to CN3240 on the system
board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly. If there is still an error, go to Check 4.
Check 4 The touch pad may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 5.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting
Check 5 The touch pad cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 8.
Check 6 Make sure the SW cable is firmly connected to CN3260 on the system board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly. If there is still an error, go to Check 7.
Check 7 The SW membrane may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 8.
Check 8 The system board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.8 Display Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.8 Display Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s display is functioning properly.
Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed.
Procedure 1: External Monitor Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Cable Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
External Monitor Check
Connect an external monitor and turn on the computer. If there is no problem on it, the
internal LCD may be defective. Go to Procedure 3. If there is any problem on the external
monitor, the system board may be defective. Go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The Display Test program is stored on the computer’s Diagnostics disk. This program checks
the display controller on the system board. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the computer’s
floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics for details. If an error is detected, go to Procedure 3.
Procedure 3
Connector Check and Cable Check
Check 1 The LCD, FL, FL Inverter Board and System Board are connected by the HV
cable and LCD/FL cable as shown bellow. Check the connections. The
connectors may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the computer
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.8 Display Troubleshooting
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and restart the computer. If there is still an error,
go to Procedure 4.
Procedure 4
Replacement Check
The FL, FL inverter board, LCD module, and system board are connected to display circuits.
Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, for
instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the following checks:
1. If characters or graphics are not displayed clearly, perform Check 1.
2. If some screen functions do not operate properly, perform Check 2.
3. If the FL remains lit when the display is closed, perform Check 4.
Check 1 Replace the FL with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still exists,
perform Check2.
Check 2 Replace the LCD module with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 3.
Check 3 Replace the display cable (FL cable and LCD cable) with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If
the problem still exists, perform Check 4.
Check 4 The display controller on the system board may be damaged. Replace the system
board with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures.
2-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the optical drive (DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW or
DVD Super Multi drive) is functioning properly. Perform the steps below starting with
Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk.
For the test, prepare test Media.
Then insert the Diagnostics Disk in the USB floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run
the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the
diagnostics test procedures.
If any errors occur while executing the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, go to Procedure 2.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The optical drive (DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW or DVD Super Multi drive) is connected to the
system board. The connectors may be disconnected from the system board or may be
damaged. Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the drive to test is firmly connected to CN1810 on the system board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still
an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The drive may be defective or damaged. Replace the drive with a new one. If
there is still an error, go to Check 3.
Check 3 Replace the system board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.
2-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s modem is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures
as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Insert the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEEE1394 test program in the USB floppy disk drive,
turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more
information about the diagnostics test procedures.
If any errors occur while executing the Sound/Modem/LAN test, go to Procedure 2.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The Modem is installed as a MDC (Modem Daughter Card). If the modem malfunctions,
there may be a bad connection between the MDC and the system board. Or the MDC, system
board or their connectors might be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the MDC is firmly connected to CN3010 on the system board and the
Modem cable is firmly connected to the Modem jack.
If connections are disconnected, connect them firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If
the modem is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The MDC may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the modem is still not functioning
properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The MDC cable may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the modem is still
not functioning properly, perform Check 4.
Check 4 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s LAN is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the LAN test program available as part of the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394
test program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to
perform the test program.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The RJ-45 jack with LAN cable is connected to the system board. If the LAN malfunctions,
the system board might be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following check:
Check 1 Make sure the RJ-45 jack is firmly connected to CN4100 on the system board.
If the connectors are disconnected, connect it firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If
the LAN function is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s Bluetooth is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures
as required.
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Connection Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Transmitting-Receiving Check
Make sure the wireless switch on the left side of the computer is turned “On”. If it is not,
slide the switch toward the back of the computer to turn it on.
Check 1 Execute Bluetooth test program. Perform the test following the instructions
described in Chapter 3, Bluetooth Test Program. You will need a second
computer that can communicate by the Bluetooth.
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working. If the computer
does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.
2-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Connection Check
The Bluetooth function wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure that the wireless communication switch is “On”.
If the switch is “Off”, turn it “On”. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure the Bluetooth module is firmly connected to the connector CN4400 on
the system board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly. If the Bluetooth module is still
not functioning properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 Make sure the Bluetooth antenna cable is firmly connected to the Bluetooth
module.
If the Bluetooth antenna cable is disconnected, connect it firmly. If the Bluetooth
module is still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.
Procedure 3
Replacement Check
The Bluetooth antenna, Bluetooth module, sound board and system board are connected to
the circuits. Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the
following checks:
Check 1 The Bluetooth module may be defective or damaged. Replace the Bluetooth
module with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
If the Bluetooth is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The Bluetooth antenna may be defective or damaged. Replace the Bluetooth
antenna with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures. If the Bluetooth is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s Wireless LAN is functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Antenna Connection Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Transmitting-Receiving Check
Make sure the wireless switch on the left side of the computer is turned “On”. If it is not,
slide the switch toward the back of the computer to turn it on.
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test
program.
Check 1 Execute test program for the wireless LAN function to check the transmitting-
receiving function of the wireless LAN. You will need a second computer that can
communicate by the wireless LAN.
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working.
If the computer does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.
2-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Antenna Connection Check
The wireless LAN wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the wireless LAN card is firmly connected to CN2600 on the system
board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly. If the wireless LAN card is still
not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure the wireless LAN antenna cables are firmly connected to the wireless
LAN card.
If the wireless LAN antenna cables are disconnected, connect them firmly. If the
wireless LAN card is still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.
Procedure 3
Replacement Check
The wireless LAN antenna, wireless LAN board and the system board are connected to the
circuits. Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the
following checks:
Check 1 The wireless LAN card may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still
exists, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The wireless LAN antenna may be defective or damaged. Replace the antenna
with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the
problem still exists, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the board with a new
one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and test the
display again.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
NOTE: On the Operation Systems other than Windows/Vivace, sounds come form the
internal speaker, even if a headphone connected.
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s sound functions are functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connecor Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Insert the Sound test program in the USB floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the
test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for details.
If an error is detected, go to Procedure 2.
2-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Connector Check
The sound function-wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following checks:
1 If the stereo speakers do not work correctly, perform Check 1.
2 If the headphone does not work correctly, perform Check 2.
3 If the microphones do not work correctly, perform Check 3.
Check 1 If the stereo speakers do not work properly, the speaker cable may be
disconnected. Make sure the speaker cable is firmly connected to CN6170 on the
system board. If the stereo speakers are still not functioning properly, go to
Procedure 3.
Check 2 If the headphone does not work properly, the headphone cable may be
disconnected. Make sure the headphone cable is firmly connected to J6310 on the
system board. If the sound function still does not work properly, Procedure 3.
Check 3 If the microphones do not work properly, the internal microphone cable or
external microphone cable may be disconnected. When the internal microphone
malfunctions, make sure the internal microphone cable is firmly connected to
CN6050 on the system board. When using the external microphone, make sure the
external microphone cable is firmly connected to J6051 on the system board.
If the microphones are still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Replacement Check
Check 1 If the stereo speakers do not sound properly, the right or left speaker may be
defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the stereo speakers still do not
work properly, go to Check 3.
Check 2 If the internal microphones do not work properly, the microphone may be
defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the microphone still does not
work properly, go to Check 3.
Check 3 If the headphone or external microphone does not sound properly, the system
board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a new one.
2-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s SD card functions are functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Check on Windows XP
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Check on Windows XP
Insert a Bridge media (SD memory card/SDIO card/Memory stick/Memory stick Pro/
xD Picture card/Multimedia card) into the slot. Check if the installed Windows recognizes
automatically the Bridge media and the data in the Bridge media can be read.
If the card is not recognized or data are not red, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The Bridge media is connected to IS2101 on the system board.
Bridge media supports SD memory card/SDIO card/Memory stick/Memory stick Pro/
xD Picture card/Multimedia card.
Check 1 The Bridge media and system board may be disconnected. Make sure the Bridge
media is firmly inserted to IS2101 on the system board. If not, insert it firmly. If
the Bridge media is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The Bridge media may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures. If the problem continues, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
CAUTION: To delete the account for confirming the fingerprint operation, it is
necessary to log on by the account with the management authority. If the
password has been set to log on, ask the Log-ON password to the user.
To check if the Fingerprint sensor works correctly or not, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
When failed in Procedure 1 to Procedure 3, execute Procedure 4.
Procedure 1: Setting Windows Log-ON password
Procedure 2: Registration of fingerprint
Procedure 3: Authentication of fingerprint
Procedure 4: Connector Check and Replacement Check
CAUTION: Scan your finger shown below.
1. Lay your finger straight to the sensor and put lightly the first joint of your
finger at the centerline of the fingerprint sensor.
2. Slide slowly your finger from the first joint to fingertip at constant speed.
When not recognized, adjust the speed.
Fingerprint
Fingerprint
sensor
sensor
2-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 1
Setting Windows Log-ON password
1. Open [User Account] from [Control Panel].
2. Click [User Account].
3. Click the icon of the account (user’s name) that you want to set the password.
4. Click “Create Account”.
5. Type a password in “Type a new password”.
6. Press Tab key.
7. Type the password again.
8. Click “Create Password” button.
9. When “Do you want to make your files and folders private” appears in [Computer
administrator], click [Yes, Make Private].
Procedure 2
Registration of fingerprint
1. Logon by user’s account to register the fingerprint.
2. Open [Start] → [All Programs] → [Protector Suite QL] → [User Enrollment].
3. After displaying [User Enrollment], click [Next].
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
[User's Passport] appears in “Enter your password”. Click [Next].
When the finger print has been enrolled, [User’s Password] appears. Slide your finger
enrolled or type the password. Click [Next].
4 Type the Windows logon password in “Enter your password” and click [Next].
[User’s Password] appears.
2-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
5 Confirm that the box of [Run interactive tutorial] is checked (when proceeding wit
seeing Tutorial) and click [Next].
6 Watch the Video carefully, click [Next].
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
7 Put lightly your finger on the fingerprint sensor at the right side of the touchpad and
slide your finger toward you.
Slide your finger four times. Four boxes are filled with fingerprints. At this time,
when you click the [Replay video], you can watch the video that you have watched in
Procedure 6.
2-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
When you have failed in any time of four times reading and want to practice again,
click [Try again]. When you have fully succeeded in four times of reading, the
message of “Fully succeeded” appears.
8 Click [Next]. The display of [User’s Fingers]
9 Click the box you want to enroll.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
Put lightly the first joint of your finger you want to enroll on the fingerprint sensor and
slide your finger toward you. Enroll your finger three times. Every time your finger has
been successfully enrolled, one box is checked. When your finger has been successfully
enrolled three times, the message of “Succeeded” appears.
When you do not enroll your finger within two minutes after [User’s Fingerprint] has been
displayed, an error message appears. At the time, click [OK] and enroll your fingerprint.
When you attempt to enroll your finger that has been enrolled, you can not enroll. Enroll
your other finger again.
10 Enroll another finger in Procedure 9. Enroll two fingers at least.
11 The display that recommend you to register a password.
12 Click [OK] in the following display.
2-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
13 Type a backup password two times in the following display. (This password is different
from the password of Windows logon.)
14 Click [Next]. The [Finish] display appears.
15 Click [Finish], “Welcome” display appears.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Authentication of fingerprint
1. Turn on the computer to start up Windows.
2. In the Windows logon window, put lightly the first joint of your finger registered and slide
your finger toward you.
When authenticated, [Success] is displayed in the fingerprint authentication display.
When not authenticated well, warning message appears. If you fail continually ten times or
more, you can not use the fingerprint authentication about one minute.
When not authenticated, type the password to logon to Windows.
2-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 4
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The Fingerprint sensor cable is connected to the connector CN9550 on the Fingerprint sensor
board and connector CN9520 on the system board.
Check 1 Check the Fingerprint sensor cable is firmly connected to the connector CN9550
on the Fingerprint sensor board and connector CN9520 on the system board. If
not, connect it firmly. If the Fingerprint sensor is still not functioning properly,
perform Check 2.
Check 2 The Fingerprint sensor cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the
problem persists, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The Fingerprint sensor board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the
problem persists, perform Check 4.
Check 4 The system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Tests and Diagnostics
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3
3-ii
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Chapter 3
Contents
3.1
The Diagnostic Test................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Diagnostics menu ................................................................................. 3-1
H/W (Hardware) initial information setting tool.................................. 3-3
Heatrun test program............................................................................ 3-3
3.2
Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Diagnostics menu (T&D)..................................................................... 3-5
H/W initial information setting tool..................................................... 3-8
Heatrun test program............................................................................ 3-8
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Setting of the hardware configuration........................................................................ 3-9
Heatrun Test............................................................................................................. 3-11
Subtest Names.......................................................................................................... 3-12
System Test.............................................................................................................. 3-14
Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-16
Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-17
Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-18
3.10 Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-21
3.11 Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-23
3.12 Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-25
3.13 Hard Disk Test......................................................................................................... 3-26
3.14 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-29
3.15 NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.16 Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-32
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-34
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names......................................................................... 3-35
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status.................................................................................... 3-38
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST................................................................................................... 3-40
3.20.1 Program Description .......................................................................... 3-40
3.20.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-40
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.21 Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-47
3.21.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-47
3.21.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-47
3.22 Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-48
3.22.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-48
3.22.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-49
3.23 Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-50
3.23.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-50
3.23.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-50
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-51
3.24.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-51
3.24.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-52
3.25 System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-56
3.25.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-56
3.25.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-57
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros) ................................................................... 3-58
3.26.1 Setting the responder machine ........................................................... 3-59
3.26.2 Test procedure.................................................................................... 3-60
3.26.3 Contents of the test and errors............................................................ 3-61
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)...................................................... 3-65
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program .................................................. 3-69
3.27.1 LAN test ............................................................................................. 3-69
3.27.2 Modem test......................................................................................... 3-72
3.27.3 Bluetooth test...................................................................................... 3-73
3.27.4 IEEE1394 test..................................................................................... 3-83
3.29 Sound Test program................................................................................................. 3-84
3.29.1 Sound (Standard) test ......................................................................... 3-84
3.29.2 Sound (Legacy) test............................................................................ 3-86
3.29.3 CD Sound (Standard) test................................................................... 3-87
3.29.4 CD Sound (Legacy) test ..................................................................... 3-89
3-iv
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 SETUP ..................................................................................................................... 3-90
3.30.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-90
3.30.2 Accessing the SETUP Program.......................................................... 3-92
Tables
Table 3-1 Subtest names .................................................................................................... 3-12
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names.................................................................... 3-35
Table 3-3 Hard disk controller status register contents...................................................... 3-38
Table 3-4 Error register contents........................................................................................ 3-39
Table 3-5 Error message.................................................................................................... 3-75
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR)....................................................... 3-76
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT).................................... 3-80
Table 3-8 Common error code ........................................................................................... 3-82
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3-vi
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
This chapter explains how to use the Diagnostic Test programs to test the functions of the
computer’s hardware modules. The Diagnostics Programs are stored on some Diagnostic
Disks. There are Service Program Modules (DIAGNOSTIC MENU) and the Test Program
Modules (DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU) on the Diagnostic Disk.
The Hardware Initial information Setting Tool consists of some programs which write the
hardware information or displays the current information of the computer. It is also included
in one of Diagnostic Disks.
The heatrun test is automatic test program which executes the some tests successively.
NOTE: Before starting the diagnostics, be sure to follow these steps:
1. Check all cables are connected firmly.
2. Exit any application and close Windows.
3. Check if [All Devices] is selected in the “Device Config.” in SETUP menu.
3.1.1 Diagnostics menu
The DIAGNOSTIC MENU consists of the following functions.
‰ DIAGNOSTIC TEST
‰ ONLY ONE TEST
‰ HEAD CLEANING
‰ LOG UTILITIES
‰ RUNNING TEST
‰ FDD UTILITIES
‰ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
‰ POWER OFF
The DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU contains the following functional tests:
‰ SYSTEM TEST
‰ MEMORY TEST
‰ KEYBOARD TEST
‰ DISPLAY TEST
‰ FLOPPY DISK TEST
‰ PRINTER TEST
‰ ASYNC TEST
‰ HARD DISK TEST
‰ REAL TIMER TEST
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
‰ NDP TEST
‰ EXPANSION TEST
‰ CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
Other tests are:
‰ Wireless LAN TEST (Wireless LAN TEST disk)
‰ LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 TEST (LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 TEST
disk)
‰ Sound TEST (Sound TEST disk)
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the Diagnostic test programs.
‰ The Diagnostic Disks (T&D for maintenance for Main,
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394, wireless LAN and Sound)
‰ A formatted working disk (Floppy disk test)
‰ USB FDD (for all tests)
‰ A USB test module (USB test )
‰ A USB cable (USB test)
‰ An external CRT monitor (Expansion test)
‰ A CD test media TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK or ABEX TEST CD-ROM
(Sound test)
‰ A DVD test media (DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1) (Sound test)
‰ A music CD (Sound test)
‰ A store-bought CD-RW media (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test)
‰ A microphone (Sound test)
‰ Headphones (Sound test)
‰ A cleaning kit to clean the floppy disk drive heads (Head Cleaning)
‰ An exclusive modem test jig (Nitto Electric Manufacture Co.,Ltd-made QE2000P01)
(Modem test)
‰ A module cable and RJ11 connector checker (Modem test)
‰ A LAN wraparound connector (LAN test)
‰ PC card wraparound connector (Expansion test)
‰ A display with monitor ID function (Expansion test)
‰ RS232C wraparound connector (Async test)
‰ A PC for wraparound test (Wireless LAN test/Bluetooth test/IEEE1394 test)
3-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1.2 H/W (Hardware) initial information setting tool
The H/W initial information setting tool consists of the following programs.
‰ Initial configuration
‰ DMI information save
‰ DMI information recovery
‰ System configuration display
‰ E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the programs.
‰ The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)
3.1.3 Heatrun test program
The heatrun test starts automatically after the selection.
You will need the following equipment to perform this program.
‰ The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
To start the DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM, follow these steps:
1. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the USB floppy disk drive.
2. Turn on the computer while pressing U key. The following menu appears.
TOSHIBA Diagnostics Startup Menu
---------------------------------------------------------
(M) Main
(I) Initial config set
(H) Heatrun
Enter a choice: M
To start the Diagnostics menu (T&D), press M or m and Enter.
To start the H/W initial information setting tool, press I or i and Enter.
To start the Heatrun test, press H or h and Enter.
NOTE: When replacing the system board, it is necessary to execute the followings:
1. Before replacing, save the DMI information by executing subtest 03 DMI
information save in 3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration.
2. Before replacing, apply the DMI information by executing subtest 04 DMI
information recovery and subtest 08 System configuration in 3.3 Setting of the
hardware configuration.
3-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2.1 Diagnostics menu (T&D)
To execute this program, press M or m in the startup menu, press Enter. The following
menu appears.
TOSHIBA personal computer XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS
version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTICS MENU :
1 - DIAGNOSTIC TEST
2 – ONLY ONE TEST
3 -
4 - HEAD CLEANING
5 - LOG UTILITIES
6 - RUNNING TEST
7 - FDD UTILITIES
8 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
9 – POWER OFF
NOTE: To exit the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press the Esc key. If a test program is
in progress, press Ctrl + Break to exit the test program. If a test program is in
progress, press Ctrl + C to stop the test program.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
Set the highlight bar to 1, and press Enter. The following DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
will appear:
TOSHIBA personal computer XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS
version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU :
1 - SYSTEM TEST
2 - MEMORY TEST
3 - KEYBOARD TEST
4 - DISPLAY TEST
5 - FLOPPY DISK TEST
6 - PRINTER TEST
7 – ASYNC TEST
8 - HARD DISK TEST
9 - REAL TIMER TEST
10 - NDP TEST
11 - EXPANSION TEST
12 - CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
88 - ERROR RETRY COUNT SET [FDD & HDD]
99 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU
Functions 1 through 12 are the Diagnostic Tests. Function 88 sets the floppy disk
drive and hard disk drive error retry count (0-255).
To exit the submenu of the Diagnostic Test and returns to the Diagnostics Menu, set
the highlight bar to function 99 and press Enter.
3-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Select the option you want to execute and press Enter. When you select 1- SYSTEM
TEST, the following message will appear:
SYSTEM TEST NAME XXXXXX xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXXSTATUS
: XXX
SUB-TEST MENU :
01 - ROM checksum
04 – Fan ON/OFF
05 - Geyserville
06 - Quick charge
07 – DMI read
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
Select the desired subtest number from the subtest menu and press Enter. The following
message will appear:
TEST LOOP : YES (or NO)
ERROR STOP : YES (or NO)
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option.
Selecting YES of TEST LOOP increases the pass counter by one, each time the test cycle
ends and restarts the test cycle.
Selecting NO returns the process to the subtest menu after the test is complete.
Use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to “ERROR STOP”.
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
Selecting YES of ERROR STOP stops the test program when an error is found and displays
the operation guide on the right side of the display screen as shown below:
ERROR STATUS NAME [[ HALT OPERATION ]]
1: Test end
2: Continue
3: Retry
These three selections have the following functions respectively:
1. Terminates the test program and exits to the subtest menu.
2. Continues the test.
3. Restarts the test from the error.
Selecting NO keeps the test running even if an error is found. When an error occurred, the
error status is displayed and one error is added to the error counter.
Table 3-1 in section 3.5 describes the function of each test on the subtest. Table 3-2 in
section 3.18 describes the error codes and error status names for each error.
Details of tests in DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU are described on and after section 3.6. As for
other service programs, refer to section 3.20 to 3.25
3.2.2 H/W initial information setting tool
After selecting this test, the following menu appears in the display.
###################################################################
######
H/W initial information setting tool VX.XX
########
###################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
1 ………………………… Initial configuration
3 ………………………… DMI information save
4 ………………………… DMI information recovery
8 ………………………… System configuration display
9 ………………………… E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
*
*
*
*
*
*******************************************************************
... Press test number [1,3,4,8,9] ?
For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.3.
3.2.3 Heatrun test program
After selecting this test, the heatrun test starts executing the same subtest as 3.23 RUNNING
TEST.
For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.4.
3-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
To execute this program, press I or i in the startup menu, press Enter and follow the
directions on the screen. The H/W initial information setting tool consists of four subtests.
Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Initial configuration
This subtest executes the following items and shows their contents in the
display. When an item ends normally, the program proceeds automatically to
the next one. When an error is found, the program stops and waits for key
input. (After solving the problem, the program executes the item again.)
Setting of the CPU set table
Setting of the micro code
Setting of the EHSS
Inputting and writing of DMI information
When the DMI information is displayed, the following messages
appear in order. Input each information. (If you do not replace the
PCB, the DMI information should not be changed.)
1. “Enter Model Name ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
model name and press Enter. (e.g. DynaBook)
2. “Enter Version Number ?” is displayed. Input the
computer’s version number and press Enter.
(e.g. PC18070C313S)
3. “Enter Serial Number ?” is displayed. Input the
computer’s serial number and press Enter. (e.g. 12345678)
4. “Enter Model Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
sales model number and press Enter. (e.g. PP200-AAAAA)
5. “Enter Bundle Number ?” is displayed. Input the
computer’s PCN/Bundle number and press Enter.
(e.g. PMSREQ3Q34H/S0123456789)
6. “Write data OK (Y/N) ?” is displayed. To write the DMI
information to the Flash ROM, press Y, and then Enter.
7. “Create DMIINFO TXT (Y/N) ?” is displayed. Press Y,
then the DMI information (text data) is written to the Floppy disk,
etc.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
•
•
•
Setting of the HWSC
Setting of the UUID
Display of the DMI information (including UUID)
After completion of the above settings, H/W configuration & DMI
information are appeared in order. Check the contents and press Enter.
Subtest 03
Subtest 04
DMI information save
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after
replacing.
This subtest saves all the DMI data in a floppy disk.
DMI information recovery
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after
replacing.
This subtest writes all the DMI data in the floppy disk into the new PCB.
NOTE: Since the data of UUID is updated every time when this subtest, DMI information
recovery, is done, the saved UUID data is not written.
Subtest 08
System configuration display
This subtest displays the information of the system configuration.
When the following message appears, confirm the contents and press Enter.
Press [Enter] key
For more details on the system configuration information, refer to “3.25
System configuration”.
Subtest 09
E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
It checks whether the MAC address, GUID of IEEE1394 and DMI
information are written.
3-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4 Heatrun Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.4 Heatrun Test
To execute this program, press H or h in the startup menu, press Enter.
After selecting this test, the same subtests as 3.23 Running Test are executed successively.
For more details on the procedure and test content, refer to Running Test.
When the heatrun test ends normally, following message appears in the display.
************************************************
HEATRUN NORMAL END
************************************************
Press any key to continue...
Press any key and return to the startup menu.
NOTE: The test result (Errorlog.txt) is stored in the floppy disk. The result is displayed in
the same format as Log Utilities. For more details of the format, refer to 3.22
Log Utilities.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.5 Subtest Names
3.5 Subtest Names
Table 3-1 lists the subtest names for each test program in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU.
Table 3-1 Subtest names (1/2)
No.
Test Name
SYSTEM
Subtest No.
Subtest Name
ROM checksum
1
01
02
03
04
05
01
02
03
04
05
Fan ON/OFF
Geyserville
Quick charge
DMI read
Conventional memory
Protected Mode
Protected Mode (cache off)
Cache memory (on/off)
Stress
2
MEMORY
3
4
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
Pressed key code display
01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
VRAM read/write for VGA
Gradation for VGA
Gradation for LCD
Gradation & Mode test for VGA
All dot on/off for LCD
“H” pattern display
LCD Brightness
5
FLOPPY DISK
01
02
03
04
05
Sequential read
Sequential read/write
Random address/data
Write specified address
Read specified address
3-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5 Subtest Names
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-1 Subtest names (2/2)
No.
Test Name
Subtest No.
Subtest Name
6
PRINTER
01
02
03
Ripple pattern
Function
[Not supported]
Wraparound
01
02
03
FIR/SIR Point to point (send)
FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)
Wraparound (board)
7
8
ASYNC
[Not supported]
HARD DISK
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Sequential read
Address uniqueness
Random address/data
Cross talk & peak shift
Partial Read
Write specified address
Read specified address
Sequential write
W-R-C specified address
9
REAL TIMER
01
02
03
Real time
Backup memory
Real time carry
10
11
NDP
01
NDP
EXPANSION
01
02
PCMCIA wraparound [Not supported]
RGB monitor ID
12
CD-ROM
/DVD-ROM
01
02
03
04
Sequential read
Read specified address
Random address/data
RW 1point W/R/C
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.6 System Test
3.6 System Test
To execute the System Test, select 1 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
ROM checksum
This subtest executes a checksum test of the BIOS ROM (range: F0000h to
FFFFFh, 64KB) on the System Board.
Subtest 02
Fan ON/OFF
The following message will appear.
Fan number select (1;FAN#1(CPU), 2;FAN#2(GPU)*1, 0; FAN#1)?
To check the CPU fan, press 1 and Enter.
To check the GPU fan, press 2 and Enter.
To check both CPU fan and GPU fan, press 0 and Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution 0000RPM start
Make sure the fan does not rotate, then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution Low speed Start
Make sure the fan rotates at low speed, then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution High speed Start
Make sure the fan rotates at high speed, then press Enter.
After a while, the fan rotating will stop.
*1 2;FAN#2(GPU)is not supported in this model.
Subtest 03
Geyserville
If the CPU supports Gerserville (SpeedStep), this subtest checks that the CPU
operating clock speed can be changed.
3-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6 System Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 04
Subtest 05
Quick charge
This subtest checks the status for the quick charge.
DMI read
This subtest displays the information in the Flash-ROM in the following
format.
*** DMI Data Display Ver X.XX ***
Model Name
: XXXXXXXXXXX
Version Number : XXXXXXXXXXXX
Serial Number : XXXXXXXX
Model Number
UUID Number
: XXXXXX-XXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Press [Enter] to EXIT
To exit this subtest and return to the SYSTEM test menu, press Enter.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.7 Memory Test
3.7 Memory Test
To execute the Memory Test, select 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Conventional memory
This subtest writes a constant data to conventional memory (0 to 640 KB),
then reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.
Subtest 02
Protected Mode
NOTE: The CONFIG.SYS file must be configured without expanded memory manager
programs such as EMM386.EXE, EMM386.SYS or QEMM386.SYS. Also, the
HIMEM.SYS must be deleted from the CONFIG.SYS file.
This subtest writes constant data and address data (from 1MB to maximum
MB), and reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.
Subtest 03
Subtest 04
Protected Mode (cache off)
This subtest executes the same way as the subtest 02 with the cache off.
Cache memory (on/off)
To test the cache memory, a pass-through write-read comparison of ‘5Ah’
data is run repeatedly to the test area (‘7000’: ‘Program’ size to ‘7000’:
‘7FFF’ (32 KB)) to check the hit-miss ratio (on/off status) for CPU cache
memory. One test takes 3 seconds.
Number of misses < Number of hits → OK
Number of misses ≥ Number of hits → Fail
Subtest 05
Stress
Write/Read buffer (1 size = B30h) is prepared in the conventional memory.
The data is made in the Write Buffer, the data in Write Buffer is written in the
area of address of 1MB or after. The data is red in the Read Buffer and data is
compared in area up to the maximum size.
Data: FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, 00h, 00h, 00h, 00h,
FFh, FFh, FFh, 00h, FFh, 00h, 00h, FFh, 00h,
00h, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, 00h, 00h, 00h, AAh
3-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.8 Keyboard Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.8 Keyboard Test
To execute the Keyboard Test, select 3 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Pressed key code display
When a key is pressed, the scan code, character code, and key top name are
displayed on the screen in the format shown below. The Ins Lock, Caps
Lock, Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Alt, Ctrl, Left Shift and Right Shift
keys are displayed in reverse screen mode when pressed. The scan codes,
character codes, and key top names are shown in Appendix E.
KEYBOARD TEST IN PROGRESS 302000
Scan code
Character code =
Keytop
Ins Lock Caps Lock Num Lock
=
=
Scroll Lock
Alt
Ctrl
Left Shift Right Shift
PRESS [Enter] KEY
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.9 Display Test
3.9 Display Test
To execute the Display Test, select 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
VRAM read/write for VGA
This subtest writes the constant data (AAh and 55h) to the video RAM. The
data is read and compared to the original data.
Subtest 02
Gradation for VGA
This subtest displays four colors: red, green, blue and white from left to right
across the screen from black to maximum brightness. The display below
appears on the screen, when this subtest is executed.
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
Subtest 03
Gradation for LCD
This subtest displays bands of gradations for mixed colors, then for red, green,
and blue. Next, it displays eight solid colors full screen: red, semi-red, green,
semi-green, blue, semi-blue, white and semi-white. Each color displays for
three seconds.
3-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.9 Display Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 04
Gradation & Mode test for VGA
This subtest displays gradations for following modes. To change the mode,
press Enter.
[Mode 12]
[Mode 13]
[Mode 3]
[Mode 111 640*480 64K]
[Mode 112 640*480 16M]
[Mode 114 800*600 64K]
[Mode 115 800*600 16M]
[Mode 117 1024*768 64K]
[Mode 118 1024*768 16M]
The display below appears on the screen when this subtest is executed.
(Display example: Mode 12)
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter after
displaying the Mode 118.
Subtest 05
All dot on/off for LCD
This subtest displays an all-white screen then an all-black screen. The display
changes automatically every three seconds and the screen returns to the
DISPLAY TEST menu.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.9 Display Test
Subtest 06
“H” pattern display
This subtest displays a full screen of “H” patterns.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
NOTE: The last row may not be completely filled. This condition does not indicate on
error.
Subtest 07
LCD Brightness
The LCD brightness changes in the following order:
Super-Bright → Bright → Semi-Bright → Bright → Super-Bright
After displaying with Super-Bright of LCD brightness, the screen returns to
the DISPLAY TEST menu.
3-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
CAUTION: Before running the floppy disk test, prepare a formatted work disk. Remove
the Diagnostics Disk and insert the work disk into the FDD because the
contents of the floppy disk will be erased.
To execute the Floppy Disk Test, select 5 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press
Enter and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
1. The following message will appear. Select the media mode and start track to be tested
and press Enter.
Test start track
(Enter:0/dd:00-79) ?
2. The Floppy Disk test contains five subtests that test the FDD.
The floppy disk test menu will appear after you select FDD test parameters.
FLOPPY DISK
XXXXXXX
XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXXSTATUS
: XXX
SUB-TEST MENU :
01 - Sequential read
02 - Sequential read/write
03 - Random address/data
04 - Write specified address
05 - Read specified address
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following
message will appear during the floppy disk test.
xxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
FLOPPY DISK IN PROGRESS XXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXXSTATUS
: XXX
When the subtest 04 or 05 is selected, the following messages will appear on the screen.
Select the test data (subtest 04 only), track number and head number you want to test.
Test data ?? (subtest 04 only)
Track No. ??
Head No. ?
Subtest 01
Sequential read
This subtest performs a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) that continuously
reads all the tracks (track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk.
Subtest 02
Subtest 03
Sequential read/write
This subtest continuously writes data pattern B5ADADh to all the tracks
(track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared
to the original data.
Random address/data
This subtest writes random data to random addresses on all tracks (track: 0 to
39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared to the
original data.
Subtest 04
Subtest 05
Write specified address
This subtest writes the data specified by an operator to a specified track, head
and address.
Read specified address
This subtest reads data from a track, head and address specified by an
operator.
3-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.11 Printer Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.11 Printer Test
NOTE: Printer Test is not supported for this model.
To execute the Printer Test, select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen.
NOTE: An IBM compatible printer must be connected to the system to execute this test.
Also, printer port wraparound connector must be connected.
The following message will appear, after selecting the subtest 01 to 03 of the printer test:
channel#1 = XXXXh
channel#2 = XXXXh
channel#3 = XXXXh
Select the channel number (1-3) ?
The printer I/O port address is specified by the XXXXh number. The computer supports
three printer channels. Select the printer channel number, and press Enter to execute the
selected subtest.
Subtest 01
Ripple pattern
This subtest prints characters for codes 20h through 7Eh line-by-line while
shifting one character to the left at the beginning of each new line.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.11 Printer Test
Subtest 02
Function
This subtest is for IBM compatible printers, and tests the following functions:
Normal print
Double-width print
Compressed print
Emphasized print
Double-strike print
All characters print
This subtest prints the various print types shown below:
Subtest 03
Wraparound
NOTE: To execute this subtest, a printer wraparound connector must be connected to the
computer’s printer port.
This subtest checks the output and bi-directional modes of the data control
and status lines through the parallel port wraparound connector
(34M741986G01). (Both output and bi-directional modes are tested.)
3-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12 Async Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.12 Async Test
NOTE: Async Test is not supported for this model.
To execute the Async Test, select 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions displayed on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want
to execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01 and 02 require the following data format:
Method
Speed
Data
: Asynchronous
: 38400BPS
: 8 bits and one parity bit (EVEN)
Data pattern : 20h to 7Eh
Subtest 01
FIR/SIR point to point (send)
NOTE: To execute subtests 01 and 02, each computer must have access to the other
computer’s infrared port.
This subtest sends 20h through 7Eh data to the receive side, then receives the
sent data and compares it to the original data through the FIR/SIR port.
Subtest 02
FIR/SIR point to point (receive)
This subtest is used with subtest 01 described above. This subtest receives the
data from the send side, then sends the received data through the FIR/SIR
port.
Subtest 03
Wraparound (board)
NOTE: To execute this subtest, a RS-232C wraparound connector must be connected to
the RS-232C port.
This subtest checks the data send/receive function through the wraparound
connector.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.13 Hard Disk Test
3.13 Hard Disk Test
To execute the Hard Disk Test, select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter,
and follow the directions on the screen.
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when subtest 02, 03, 04, 06, 08
or 09 is executed. Before running the test, the customer should transfer the
contents of the hard disk to floppy disk or another hard disk. If the customer
has not or can not perform the back-up, create back-up disks as described
below.
Check to see if the Microsoft Create System Disks Tools (MSCSD.EXE) still
exists in the System Tools Folder. (This tool can be used only once.) If it
exists, use it to back up the pre-installed software, then use the Backup
utility in the System Tools folder to back up the entire disk, including the
user’s files.
Refer to the operating system instructions.
1. The following message appears for the error dump operation when a data compare
error is detected. Select 1 or 2.
Data compare error dump (1:no, 2:yes)
2. The following message appears for whether or not the HDC status is displayed on the
screen. The HDC status is described in section 3.19. Select 1 or 2.
Detail status display (1:no, 2:yes)
3-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13 Hard Disk Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3. The Hard Disk Test message will appear after you respond to the Detail Status
prompt. Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The
following message will appear during each subtest.
XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
HARD DISK TEST XXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
STATUS
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
: XXX
The first three digits of the ADDRESS indicate which cylinder is being tested, the
fourth digit indicates the head number and the last two digits indicate the sector
number.
The first digit of the STATUS indicates the drive being tested and the last two digits
indicate the error status code as explained in the table 3-2 of the section 3.18.
Subtest 01
Sequential read
This subtest is a sequential reading of all the tracks on the HDD starting at
track 0. When all the tracks on the HDD have been read, the test starts at the
maximum track and reads the tracks on the HDD sequentially back to track 0.
Subtest 02
Address uniqueness
This subtest writes unique address data to each sector of the HDD track-by-
track. The data written to each sector is then read and compared with the
original data. There are three ways the HDD can be read:
1. Forward sequential
2. Reverse sequential
3. Random
Subtest 03
Random address/data
This subtest writes random data in a random length to random addresses. This
data is then read and compared to the original data.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.13 Hard Disk Test
Subtest 04
Cross talk & peak shift
This subtest writes eight types of worst pattern data (listed below) to a
cylinder and then reads the data while moving from cylinder to cylinder.
(Tests the data interference in the neighbor track.)
Worst pattern data
Cylinder
‘B5ADAD’
‘4A5252’
‘EB6DB6’
‘149749’
’63B63B’
‘9C49C4’
‘2DB6DB’
‘D24974’
0 cylinder
1 cylinder
2 cylinder
3 cylinder
4 cylinder
5 cylinder
6 cylinder
7 cylinder
Subtest 05
Partial Read
This subtest reads 1GB data which is in minimum, middle and maximum
address of the HDD area.
Subtest 06
Subtest 07
Write specified address
This subtest writes specified data to a specified cylinder and head on the
HDD.
Read specified address
This subtest reads data, which has been written to a specified cylinder and
head on the HDD.
Subtest 08
Subtest 09
Sequential write
This subtest writes specified 2-byte data to all of the cylinders on the HDD.
W-R-C specified address
This subtest writes data to a specified cylinder and head on the HDD, then
reads the data and compares it to the original data.
3-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.14 Real Timer Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3
3.14 Real Timer Test
To execute the Real Timer Test, select 9 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Real time
A new date and time can be input during this subtest. To execute the real time
subtest, follow these steps:
1. Select subtest 01 and the following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new date:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST
2. If the current date is not correct, input the correct date at the “Enter new
date” prompt and press Enter.
3. The following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new time:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST
4. If the current time is not correct, input the correct time in 24-hour format.
To enter “:”, press Shift + ;. The time is updated.
To exit the test, press Enter.
Subtest 02
Backup memory
This subtest checks the following backup memories:
Writes 1-bit of “on” data (01h through 80h) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes 1-bit of “off” data (FEh through 7Fh) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes the data pattern AAh and 55h to the address 0Eh to 7Fh
Then the subtest reads and compares this data with the original data.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.14 Real Timer Test
Subtest 03
Real time carry
When this subtest is executed, the current date and time are erased.
CAUTION:
This subtest checks the real time clock increments, making sure the date and
time are displayed in the following format:
Current date : 12-31-1999
Current time : 23:59:58
The real time increments are automatically executed and the following is
displayed:
Current date : 01-01-2000
Current time : 00:00:00
PRESS [Enter] KEY TO EXIT TEST
To exit the test, press Enter.
3-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.15 NDP Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.15 NDP Test
To execute the NDP test, select 10 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01
NDP
This test checks the following functions of NDP:
‰ Control word
‰ Status word
‰ Bus
‰ Addition
‰ Multiplication
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.16 Expansion Test
3.16 Expansion Test
To execute the expansion test, select 11 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press
Enter and follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01
PCMCIA wraparound
CAUTION: PCMCIA wraparound test is not supported for this model.
NOTE: To execute this subtest, the PC card wraparound connector is required.
This subtest checks the following signal line of the PC card slot:
‰ Address line
‰ REG#, CE#1, CE#2 line
‰ Data line
‰ Speaker line
‰ Wait line
‰ BSY#, BVD1 line
This subtest is executed in the following order:
Sub#
Address
Good
Bad
Contents
Address line
REG#, CE#1, CE#2
nn=A0, 90, 80, 00
01
00001
00001
nn
nn
xx
xx
02
00002
ww
rr
Data line
ww=write data, rr=read
data
03
04
05
00003
00004
00005
––
40,80
nn
––
xx
xx
Speaker line
Wait line (40<xx<80)
Other lines (BSY#, BVD1)
NN=21, 00
NOTE: Select the subtest number01, The following message will appear:
Test slot number select (1:slot0, 2:slot1, 0:slot0&1)?
3-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.16 Expansion Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 02
RGB monitor ID
NOTE: To execute this subtest, an external monitor with monitor ID function is required.
Connect the external monitor to the PC for the test of ID acquisition.
The judgment of acquisition is based on the panel data. In simultaneous
display mode or internal display mode, in which the panel data is acquired,
this subtest will fail. Therefore, make sure only the external display is selected
when executing this subtest.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test
To execute the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, select 12 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU,
press Enter and follow the directions on the screen.
NOTE: For the subtest 01, 02 and 03, use the TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK TDY-01
or ABEX TEST CD-ROM TCDR-702 and DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1. For the
subtest 04, use a CD-RW on the market.
Subtest 01
Sequential read
This subtest is a sequential reading of one-block units (2K bytes) of all the
logical addresses.
Subtest 02
Subtest 03
Read specified address
This subtest reads one-block data from a specified address.
Random address/data
This subtest reads one-block data and multi-block data from random addresses
200 times.
Subtest 04
RW 1point W/R/C
This subtest writes, reads and compares data at one point on a CD/RW media.
3-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
Table 3-2 lists the error codes and error status names for the DIAGNOSTIC TEST.
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (1/3)
Device name
(Common)
Error code
Error status name
Data Compare Error
FF
ROM - CHECKSUM ERROR
System
01
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
ROM - SERIAL ID WRITE ERROR
ROM - NOT SUPPORTED PS-SYSTEM
ROM - SENSING ERROR(AC-ADAPT)
ROM - SENSING ERROR(1st Batt)
ROM - SENSING ERROR(2nd Batt)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(1)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(2)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(3)
Memory
01
02
DD
RAM - PARITY ERROR
RAM - PROTECTED MODE NO CHANGE'
RAM - CACHE MEMORY ERROR
Keyboard
FE
FD
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
EF
ED
USB - GET DESCR.ERROR (FIRST)
USB - SET ADDRESS ERROR
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR(Top 8B)
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR (Whole)
HUB - SET CONFIGURATION ERROR
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR(DESCR.)
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(P ON)
HUB - GET STATUS ERROR
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(RESET)
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE ERROR
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE1 ERROR
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(Enab.)
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE2 ERROR
USB - OVER CURRENT ERROR
USB - GET DESCR.ERROR(SECOND)
Display
EE
VRAM SIZE NOT SUPPORT
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (2/3)
Device name
FDD
Error code
Error status name
01
02
03
04
08
09
10
20
40
80
60
06
EE
FDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR
FDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND
FDD - WRITE PROTECTED
FDD - RECORD NOT FOUND
FDD - DMA OVERRUN ERROR
FDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR
FDD - CRC ERROR
FDD - FDC ERROR
FDD - SEEK ERROR
FDD - TIME OUT ERROR
FDD - NOT DRIVE ERROR
FDD - MEDIA REMOVED
FDD - WRITE BUFFER ERROR
Printer
01
08
10
20
40
80
PRT - TIME OUT
PRT – FAULT
PRT - SELECT LINE
PRT - OUT OF PAPER
PRT - POWER OFF
PRT - BUSY LINE
ASYNC
01
02
04
08
10
20
40
80
88
05
06
RS232C - [DTR ON] TIME OUT
RS232C - [CTS ON] TIME OUT
RS232C - [RX READY] TIME OUT
RS232C - [TX FULL] TIME OUT
RS232C - PARITY ERROR
RS232C - FRAMING ERROR
RS232C - OVERRUN ERROR
RS232C - LINE STATUS ERROR
RS232C - MODEM STATUS ERROR
SIR - TIME OUT ERROR
FIR - TIME OUT ERROR
HDD
05
07
09
0B
BB
08
01
02
04
10
20
40
80
11
AA
HDD - HDC NOT RESET ERROR
HDD - DRIVE NOT INITIALIZE
HDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR
HDD - BAD TRACK ERROR
HDD - UNDEFINED ERROR
HDD - OVERRUN ERROR (DRQ ON)
HDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR
HDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND
HDD - RECORD NOT FOUND ERROR
HDD - ECC ERROR
HDD - HDC ERROR
HDD - SEEK ERROR
HDD - TIME OUT ERROR
HDD - ECC RECOVER ENABLE
HDD - DRIVE NOT READY
3-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (3/3)
Device name
(HDD)
Error code
Error status name
HDD - WRITE FAULT
HDD - STATUS ERROR
HDD - BAD SECTOR
HDD - ACCESS TIME ERROR
HDD - NO HDD
HDD - DMA CRC ERROR
CC
E0
0A
EE
DA
12
NDP
01
02
03
04
05
06
NDP - NO CO-PROCESSOR
NDP - CONTROL WORD ERROR
NDP - STATUS WORD ERROR
NDP - BUS ERROR
NDP - ADDITION ERROR
NDP - MULTIPLAY ERROR
EXPANSION
C1
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
CB
CC
CE
CF
ADDRESS LINE ERROR
CE#1 LINE ERROR
CE#2 LINE ERROR
DATA LINE ERROR
WAIT LINE ERROR
BSY# LINE ERROR
BVD1 LINE ERROR
ZV-Port ERROR
NO PCMCIA
CARD TYPE ERROR
ZV_CONT# ERROR
CD-ROM
/DVD-ROM
01
02
03
04
05
06
09
11
20
40
80
90
B0
BAD COMMAND
ILLEGAL LENGTH
UNIT ATTENTION
MEDIA CHANGE REQUEST
MEDIA DETECTED
ADDITIMAL SENSE
BOUNDARY ERROR
CORRECTED DATA ERROR
DRIVE NOT READY
SEEK ERROR
TIME OUT
RESET ERROR
ADDRESS ERROR
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
When an error occurs in the hard disk test, the following message is displayed:
HDC status = XXXXXXXX
Detailed information about the hard disk test error is displayed on the screen by an eight-
digit number. The first four digits represent the hard disk controller (HDC) error status
number and the last four digits are not used.
The hard disk controller error status is composed of two bytes; the first byte displays the
contents of the HDC status register in hexadecimal form and the second byte displays the
HDC error register.
The contents of the HDC status register and error register are listed in Tables 3-3 and 3-4.
Table 3-3 Hard disk controller status register contents
Bit
Name
Description
7
BSY
(Busy)
“0” … HDC is ready.
“1” … HDC is busy.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DRY
(Drive ready)
“0” … Hard disk drive is not ready to accept any command.
“1” … Hard disk drive is ready.
DWF
(Drive write fault)
“0” … DWF error is not detected.
“1” … Write fault condition occurred.
DSC
“0” … The hard disk drive heads are not settled over a track.
“1” … The hard disk drive heads are settled over a track.
(Drive seek complete)
DRQ
(Data request)
“0” … Drive is not ready for data transfer.
“1” … Drive is ready for data transfer.
COR
(Corrected data)
“0” … Not used
“1” … Correctable data error is corrected.
IDX
(Index)
“0” … Not used
“1” … Index is sensed.
ERR
“0” … Normal
(Error)
“1” … The previous command was terminated with an error.
3-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-4 Error register contents
Bit
Name
Description
7
BBK
“0” … Not used.
(Bad block mark)
“1” … A bad block mark is detected.
6
UNC
“0” … There is no uncorrectable data error.
(Uncorrectable)
“1” … Uncorrectable data error has been detected.
5
4
——
Not used.
IDN
“0” … Not used.
(Identification)
“1” … There is no ID field in the requested sector.
3
2
——
Not used
ABT
“0” … Not used.
(Abort)
“1” … Illegal command error or command abort.
1
TK0
(Track 0)
“0” … The hard disk found track 0 during a recalibrate
command.
“1” … The hard disk could not find track 0 during a
recalibrate command.
0
——
Not used.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3.20.1 Program Description
This program tests the unique functions of this model.
3.20.2 Operations
Select test 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter. The following menu appears
in the display.
#################################################################
########
ONLY ONE TEST Menu (XXXXXXXXX)
########
#################################################################
*
*
* 1 ............ Pressed Key Display
* 2 ............ Touch Pad
* 3 ............ GP Button
* 4 ............ Wireless communication switch
* 5 ............ USB
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* 6 ............ LED
* A ............ Acceleration sensor
*
* 9 ............ Exit to Common Test
*
*****************************************************************
.... Press test number [1-A] ?
Select the subtest number you want to test and press Enter.
To return to the DIAGNOSTIC TEST menu, select 9 and press Enter.
3-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 01
Pressed key display
When you execute this subtest, the keyboard layout is drawn on the display as
shown below. When any key is pressed, the corresponding key on the screen
changes to the key character that was pressed. Holding a key down enables
the auto-repeat function that causes the key’s display character to blink.
Press Del + Enter to end the test.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
Subtest 02
Touch Pad
This subtest checks the functions of the touch pad as shown below.
A) Direction and parameter
B) Switching function check.
This test displays the response from the touch pad and touch pad switch.
When moving your finger on the touch pad towards the upper left, the
<POINTING> display changes according to the following illustration. If a
touch pad switch is pressed, the <BUTTONS> displays appear on the right side
one by one. The parameters appear above the <BUTTONS> (1) or (2)
corresponding to the pressed touch pad switch highlights. To end this subtest,
press two touch pad switches at the same time.
3-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 03
GP Button
This subtest checks the operation of the front operation panel button.
Press the Internet button after the following message appears.
Press [ Internet ] button
If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ CD/DVD ] button
If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ Play/pause ] button
If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ Stop ] button
If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ Rewind ] button
If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ Fforward ] button
If the correct button is pressed, the display returns to the ONLY ONE TEST
menu.
Subtest 04
Wireless communication switch
This subtest checks if the Wireless communication switch works properly.
If the test is started with the switch ON, following message appears in the
display.
Wireless communication switch is set to a start position (OFF)
Slide the switch to OFF position. Then, following message appears in the
display.
Wireless communication switch ON !!
Slide the switch to ON position. Then, following message appears in the
display.
Wireless communication switch OFF !!
After Sliding the switch to OFF position, return to the ONLY ONE TEST
menu automatically.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
Subtest 05
USB
NOTE: When executing this subtest, USB test module and USB cable must be connected.
This subtest checks if USB port works properly.
The following menu appears in the display.
################################################################
########
ONLY ONE TEST Menu (XXXXXXXXX)
######
################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
* 0 ............ Port 0 (Left side)
* 1 ............ Port 1 (Right side Upper)
* 9 ............ EXIT 2 (Right side Lower)
*
****************************************************************
.... Press test number[0-1, 9] ?
Connect the USB test module and USB cable to the computer.
Input the port test number and press Enter.
OK message appears in the display if the test ends without fail.
NG message appears in the display if an error is found during the test.
Confirm the connection of cable, and then execute the test again.
Press 9 and Enter to return to ONLY ONE TEST menu.
Subtest 06
LED
This subtest checks if each LED lights properly.
The following message appears in the display in order. Follow the instructions
in the display to execute the test.
[HDD Access LED test]
Press any key and following message appears in the display.
[Caps/Num/Overlay BT/W-LAN LED test]
(1) Press [Caps Lock ] key ! ...Caps
(on/off)
(2) Press [Fn + F10 ] key ! ...Arrow (on/off)
(3) Press [Fn + F11 ] key ! ...Num
(4) Slide [BT/W-LAN switch L&R]!
(on/off)
(on/off)
Confirm corresponding LED lights properly.
Press Enter and following message appears in the display.
Check [DC-IN]&[Power]&[Main Battery]LED= Green
Check if the color of the message changes blue to green alternately.
3-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Press Enter and return to the ONLY ONE TEST menu.
Acceleration sensor
This subtest detects and corrects the each axis (X, Y, Z).
Subtest 0A
NOTE: Make sure that this subtest is executed on the following condition:
1. Flat desk with vertical plane to get the stability of machine.
2. The vertical wall or plane is necessary.
3. Prevent the machine from shake or shock.
<Example>
Set the machine
against the vertical plane
Vertical plane
with the Front upward
Flat desk
The figure below shows the name and position of each side.
Top
(heaven surface)
Right side
Back
Front
Left side
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
When this subtest is selected, the following message appears in the display.
The heaven surface establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
NOTE: Be sure to execute the test with the display panel opened.
Set the machine on the flat desk. Then press Enter to detect the data on this
setting of machine. The following message appears in the display.
The back establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the back of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The right establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the right side
of machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The front establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the front of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The left establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the left side of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine.
When there is no defective during the all checks above, the following message
appears in the display. Then press Enter and return to the Only One Test
menu.
** Setting OK! **
Press [Enter] key
When any trouble in the above setting is found, the following message appears
and the test halts. Then press Enter and return to the Only One Test menu.
** Setting ERROR! **
Press [Enter] key
3-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.21 Head Cleaning
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.21 Head Cleaning
3.21.1 Function Description
This function cleans the heads in the FDD by executing a series of head load/seek and read
operations. A cleaning kit is necessary to perform this program.
3.21.2 Operations
1. Selecting test 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the
following messages:
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK HEAD CLEANING : VX.XX
Mount cleaning disk(s) on drive(s).
Press any key when ready.
2. Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, then insert the cleaning disk and press
Enter.
3. When the “cleaning start” message appears, the FDD head cleaning has begun.
4. The display automatically returns to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU when the program is
completed.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.22 Log Utilities
3.22 Log Utilities
3.22.1 Function Description
This function logs error information generated while a test is in progress and stores the results
in RAM. This function can store data on a floppy disk, or output the data to a printer or the
display.
The error information is displayed in the following order:
1. Error count (CNT)
2. Test name, Subtest number (TS-No)
3. Pass count (PASS)
4. Error status (STS)
5. FDD/HDD or memory address (ADDR)
6. Write data (WD)
7. Read data (RD)
8. HDC status (HSTS)
9. Error status name (ERROR STATUS NAME)
If the power switch is turned off, the error information will be lost.
3-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.22 Log Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.22.2 Operations
1. Select 5 and press Enter in the DIAGNOSTIC MENU, the error information is
displayed in the following format:
XXXXX ERRORS
CNT TS-NO PASS STS ADDR WDRDHSTS [ERROR STATUS NAME]
001 FDD 02 0000 103 00001 00000000 FDD-WRITE PROTECTED
001 FDD 01 0000 180 00001 00000000 FDD-TIME OUT ERROR
Address
Error status
HDC status
Pass count
Read data
Subtest number
Error status name
Write data
Test name
Error count
[[1:Next,2:Prev,3:Exit,4:Clear,5:Print,6:FD Log Read,7:FD Log Write]]
2. The error information displayed on the screen can be manipulated by the following
number keys:
The 1 key scrolls the display to the next page.
The 2 key scrolls the display to the previous page.
The 3 key returns to the Diagnostic Menu.
The 4 key erases all error log information in RAM.
The 5 key outputs the error log information to a printer.
The 6 key reads the log information from a floppy disk.
The 7 key writes the log information to a floppy disk.
3. In the case of “error retry OK”, a capital “R” will be placed at the beginning of the
error status. However, it is not added to the error count.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.23 Running Test
3.23 Running Test
3.23.1 Function Description
This function automatically executes the following tests in sequence:
1. System test (subtest 01)
2. Memory test (subtests 01, 02, 06)
3. Display test (subtest 01)
4. Real timer test (subtest 02)
5. HDD test (subtest 01)
The system automatically detects the number of floppy disk drives connected to the computer
for the FDD test.
3.23.2 Operations
NOTE: After booting up the Running test, pull out the test program and insert a floppy
disk which has been formatted by FORMAT command of DOS.
1. Pull out the test program and insert a floppy disk which has been formatted by
FORMAT command of DOS.
2. Select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter, the following messages
for selectable tests will appear in the display in order.
FDD write/read test (Y/N) ?
Printer wrap around test (Y/N) ?
Serial wrap around test (Y/N) ?
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test (Y/N) ?
3. To execute the test, press Y and Enter. To cancel the test, press N and Enter. If you
select the selectable tests, follow the instruction message in the display.
4. After selecting the selectable tests, the running test starts automatically. To terminate
the program, press Ctrl + Break.
3-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3.24.1 Function Description
This function formats the FDD, copies the floppy disk and displays the dump list for both the
FDD and HDD.
1. FORMAT
NOTE: This program is only for testing a floppy disk drive. It is different from the
Toshiba MS-DOS FORMAT command.
This program can format a floppy disk in the following formats:
(a) 2DD: Double-sided, double-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode,
512 bytes, 9 sectors/track.
(b) 2HD: Double-sided, high-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode, 512
bytes, 18 sectors/track.
2. COPY
This program copies data from a source floppy disk to a target floppy disk.
3. DUMP
This program displays the contents of the floppy disk and the designated sectors of
the hard disk on the display.
4. HDD ID READ
This program reads the hard disk ID and displays hard disk information.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3.24.2 Operations
1. Selecting 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the
following message.
[ FDD UTILITIES ]
1 - FORMAT
2 - COPY
3 - DUMP
4 – HDD-ID READ
9 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU
2. FORMAT program
(a) Selecting FORMAT displays the following message.
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK FORMAT : VX.XX
Drive number select (1:A, 2:B) ?
(b) Select a drive number to display the following message.
Type select (0:2DD, 3:2HD) ?
(c) Select a media/drive type number and press Enter. A message similar to the
one below will be displayed.
Warning : Disk data will be destroyed.
Insert work disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(d) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the work disk and press
any key.
The following message will be displayed when the FDD format is executed.
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK = XXX
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD = X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Format start
[[track, head = XXX X]]
After the floppy disk is formatted, the following message will appear.
Format complete
Another format (1:Yes/2:No) ?
(e) Typing 1 displays the message from step (c) above. Typing 2 returns the test
to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
3-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3. COPY program
(a) When COPY is selected, the following message appears.
FLOPPY DISK FORMAT & COPY : VX.XX
Type select (0:2DD,3:2HD) ?
(b) Selecting a media/drive type number will display a message similar to the one
below.
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(c) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the source disk and press
any key. The following message will appear, indicating the program has
started.
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD
= XXX
= X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Copy start
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]
(d) The following message will appear.
Insert target disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(e) Remove the source disk from the FDD, then insert a formatted work disk and
press any key. The following message will appear and start copying to the
target disk.
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]
(f) When the amount of data is too large to be copied in one operation, the
message from step (b) is displayed again. After the floppy disk has been
copied, the following message will appear.
Copy complete
Another copy (1:Yes/2:No) ?
(g) To copy another disk, type 1 and the message from step (a) is displayed again.
Entering 2 returns the test program to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
4. DUMP program
(a) When DUMP is selected, the following message appears.
DIAGNOSTICS-HARD DISK & FLOPPY DISK DUMP : VX.XX
Drive type select (1:FDD, 2:HDD) ?
(b) Select a drive type. If 2:HDDis selected, the display will go to step (h). If
1:FDDis selected, the following message will appear.
Select drive number (1:A, 2:B) ?
(c) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
Format type select (1:2DD, 3:2HD) ?
(d) If 3:2HDis selected, the following message will appear. Select a media mode.
2HD media mode (1:1.20MB, 2:1.44MB, 3:1.23MB)?
(e) The following message will appear.
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(f) Insert a source disk and press any key and the following message will appear.
—— Max. address ——
[Track ] = XXXX
[Head ] = XX
[Sector] = XX
Track number ????
(g) Set the track number, head number and sector number you want to dump. The
system will access the disk and dump a list. Then the message shown in (k)
will appear.
(h) The following message will appear when selecting 2:HDDin (a).
Select drive number (1:C, 2:D) ?
(i) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
---Max. address ---
[LBA ] = XXXXXXXXX
LBA number ????????
(j) Set the LBA number you want to dump. The system will access the disk and
dump a list.
3-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
(k) The following message will appear. To finish the dump, select 3.
Press number key (1:up,2:down,3:end) ?
(l) The following message will appear. Selecting 2 returns to the FDD
UTILITIES MENU.
Another dump (1:Yes,2:No) ?
5. HDD ID READ program
Selecting HDD ID displays the following HDD ID configuration.
[HDD ID Read (VX.XX)] [Drive #1]
Model No.
= XXXXXXX
Press Enter to return to the FDD UTILITIES MENU.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.25 System Configuration
3
3.25 System Configuration
3.25.1 Function Description
NOTE: To display the system configuration, the write protect tab should be OFF
position. If the tab is ON position, move the tab to OFF position and restart the
test. Otherwise the correct information cannot be acquired.
The System Configuration program contains the following configuration information for the
computer:
1. Processor Type [Code/L2 cache]
2. Chip set [VRAM]
3. BIOS ROM version [1st ID, 2nd ID]
4. Boot ROM version
5. EC total version
6. PS Microprocessor version
7. Micro code revision [Processor number]
8. Total Memory Size [Conventional memory]
9. Battery code
10. HWSC
11. FSB [Voltage]
12. The number of printer ports
13. The number of ASYNC ports
14. Math co-processors
15. Floppy Disk Drive [Track/Head/Sector]
16. Hard Disk Drive [Sector/Drive size/Manufacture code]
17. T&D total version
18. Date/Time
3-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.25 System Configuration
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.25.2 Operations
Select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter. Then, the following system
configuration appears in the display.
System Configuration Display : Ver X.XX [Machine Name ???]
* - Processor Type
* - Chip set
* - BIOS ROM Version
* - BOOT ROM Version
* - EC Total Version
* - PS Micon Version
= XXXXXX-XXXXXMHz
= XXXXXX
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
Code = XX
L2 Cache = XXXXXKB
VRAM = XXXXMB
1st ID = XXH, 2nd ID = XXH
* - Micro code Revision = VX.XX
(Processor=XXXh)
* - Total Memory Size = XXXXXXMB (Conventional Memory = XXXKB)
* - Battery Code
* - HWSC
= XXXXXXXXXXXX
= XXXXXXX
* - FSB
= XXXXXMHz (Voltage = XEh)
LPT1 = XXXX LPT2 = XXXX LPT3 = XXXX
COM1 = XXXX COM2 = XXXX COM3 = XXXX
* - X Printer Adapter
* - X ASYNC Adapter
* - X Math CO-Processor
* - X USB Floppy Disk Drive(s) Track = XX Head = XX, Sector = XX
* - X Hard Disk Drive(s)
#1 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX GB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
#2 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX GB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
* - T&D Total Version = VX.XX
Press [Enter] Key
[Date = XXXX-YY-ZZ, XX:YY:ZZ]
Press Enter to return to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test with the
test program.
NOTE: Use another computer (with Atheros 11a/g(MB44ag)/Atheros 11a/g(MB62HL))
that can communicate by the wireless LAN as a responder machine to perform
this test.
The computer must be booted by the Responder T&D.
In this test, the following items are tested:
(1) SKU check of Module
(2) MAC Address Check
(3) Communication test of 11a mode
(4) Communication test of 11b mode
(5) Communication test of 11g mode
(6) SKU & MAC Check,11a/b/g communication test
NOTE: This test take time until it completes.
To start the Wireless LAN test program, follow the steps below:
NOTE: Before starting the wireless LAN test, make sure the Wireless Communication
Switch of the computer is turned on. (The Wireless Communication LED lights
orange.)
3-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.26.1 Setting the responder machine
1. MB44ag is installed
1) Boot the computer by MB4x Responder media.
2) The Responder T&D is automatically started.
2. MB6x is installed
As the capacity of MB6x T&D is over the one of a FD, a RAM drive is used.
1) Boot the computer by MB6x Responder media.
2) After starting the OS, following message is displayed. input m and press Enter.
***********************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Atheros MB4x/MB5x/MB6x Maintenance T&D Menu
* s : Atheros MB4x DUT mode
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB4x DUT media
*
* h : Atheros MB5x DUT mode
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB5x DUT media
*
* r : Atheros MB5x Responder mode
*
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB5x Responder media
* m : Atheros MB6x setup mode
*
***********************************************************
Please input the ( s / h / r / m ) key and push the "Enter" key :
3) The RAM drive name which has been set at booting is displayed and command input
is requested. Input mb6x X and press Enter. The part of X is the RAM drive name.
In the following display, it is “C”.
1,440 (1K) C:
Installed Device=RAMDRIVE
Please input the following command. "mb6x X" > mb6x c [Enter]
4) The following message is displayed. Change the FD with “MB6x setup media 1” and
press Enter. The file copy from the FD to the RAM drive is started.
Please exchange FD for "MB6x setup media 1"
Press any Key to continue . . .
5) The following message is displayed. Change the FD with “MB6x setup media 2” and
press Enter. The file copy from the FD to the RAM drive is started.
Please exchange FD for "MB6x setup media 2"
Press any Key to continue . . .
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)
6) When the file copy is completed, the following test menu is displayed. Press r. The
Responder T&D is started.
************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Atheros MB6x DUT mode Maintenance T&D Menu
d : DUT mode
r : Responder mode
************************************************************
SELECT MODE No.(d or r) :
3.26.2 Test procedure
The following procedures show how to start the computer of DUT side.
1) Boot the computer by Atheros T&D boot media.
2) After displaying the following menu, input m and press Enter.
***********************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Atheros MB4x/MB5x/MB6x Maintenance T&D Menu
* s : Atheros MB4x DUT mode
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB4x DUT media
*
* h : Atheros MB5x DUT mode
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB5x DUT media
*
* r : Atheros MB5x Responder mode
*
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB5x Responder media
* m : Atheros MB6x setup mode
*
***********************************************************
Please input the ( s / h / r / m ) key and push the "Enter" key :
3) The following message is displayed. Change the FD with “MB6x setup media 1” and
press Enter. The file copy from the FD to the RAM drive is started.
Please exchange FD for "MB6x setup media 1"
Press any Key to continue . . .
4) The following message is displayed. Change the FD with “MB6x setup media 2” and
press Enter. The file copy from the FD to the RAM drive is started.
Please exchange FD for "MB6x setup media 2"
Press any Key to continue . . .
3-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
5) When the file copy is completed, the following test menu is displayed. Press d. The
Responder T&D is started.
************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Atheros MB6x DUT mode Maintenance T&D Menu
d : DUT mode
r : Responder mode
************************************************************
SELECT MODE No.(d or r) :
6) The following test menu is displayed. Select the test number.
************************************************************
*
Atheros MB6x DUT mode Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
* 1 : SKU check of Module
* 2 : MAC Address Check
* 3 : Communication test of 11a mode
* 4 : Communication test of 11a mode(Main Antenna Only) *
* 5 : Communication test of 11b mode
* 6 : Communication test of 11b mode(Main Antenna Only) *
* 7 : Communication test of 11g mode
* 8 : Communication test of 11g mode(Main Antenna Only) *
*
*
* 9 : All the tests of module
*
*
*
*
*
(SKU & MAC Check,11a/b/g communication test)
* A : All the tests of module(Main Antenna Only)
*
(SKU & MAC Check,11a/b/g communication test)
************************************************************
SELECT TEST No.(1-A) :
3.26.3 Contents of the test and errors
1. SKU check of Module
The SKU (destination) of the Wireless LAN card installed is displayed. Visually check it.
*********************************************
*
*
*
*
*
* Module : Atheros MB62HL (MoW)
* G-code : G360001Q210
*
*********************************************
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)
When an error (read error of EEPROM date) has detected, the following is displayed.
------------ERROR------------
file bac.txt cannot be opened
2. MAC Address Check
The MAC address of the installed Wireless LAN card is checked. If it is not incorrect
MAC address, the following is displayed.
************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : OK !!
************************************
a. Case of All FF error
*****************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Mac Address Check NG
FFFFFF-FFFFFFh
*****************************************
b. Case of All 00 error
*****************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Mac Address Check NG
000000-000000h
*****************************************
3. Communication test of 11a mode
The check of connection of 11a mode antenna and transmitting/receiving test are executed.
When the test has been finished normally, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
* 11a Communication Test : OK !! *
*
*
**************************************
3-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
When an error has detected, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
* 11a Communication Test : NG !! *
*
*
*
*
*
*
Please refer to log.txt
**************************************
4. Communication test of 11b mode
The check of connection of 11b mode antenna and transmitting/receiving test are executed.
When the test has been finished normally, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
* 11b Communication Test : OK !! *
*
*
**************************************
When an error has detected, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
* 11b Communication Test : NG !! *
*
*
*
*
*
*
Please refer to log.txt
**************************************
5. Communication test of 11g mode
The check of connection of 11g mode antenna and transmitting/receiving test are executed.
When the test has been finished normally, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
* 11g Communication Test : OK !! *
*
*
**************************************
When an error has detected, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
* 11g Communication Test : NG !! *
*
*
*
*
*
*
Please refer to log.txt
**************************************
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)
6. SKU & MAC Check 11a/b/g communication test
All the test is executed in the order of SKU check of Module, MAC Address Check,
Communication test of 11a mode, Communication test of 11b mode and Communication
test of 11g mode.
The check of connection of 11g mode antenna and transmitting/receiving test are executed.
3-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Intel-
made 802.11a/b/g). To execute the wireless LAN test, use the Diagnostics disk for wireless
LAN test. Finish the tests of the Main test program by selecting 99 - EXIT TO
DIAGNOSTICS MENU in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU. Then in the DIAGNOSTICS
MENU, select 9 - EXIT TO MS-DOS.
Insert the Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test into the Floppy Disk Drive. Turn on the
power while pressing U.
The following menu appears in the display.
***********************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection
Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 : SKU check of Module
2 : MAC Address Check
3 : Antenna Check & communication test of 11b mode *
*
4 : Communication test of 11a mode
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
5 : Communication test of 11g mode
6 : All the tests of 11a/g Card
(SKU & MAC Check, 11a/b/g communication test)
***********************************************************
SELECT TEST No, (1-6):
To execute the subtest, input the subtest number and press Enter.
Subtest01
SKU check of module
This subtest displays SKU information on the wireless LAN card installed.
Selecting this subtest, following message will appear in the display. Confirm
if the right information on the wireless LAN card is described.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Module : Module : Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG
Network Connection (Mow1)
G-code : G360001U110
TA No. : D26539
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Using a wrong wireless LAN card (Using unspecified card)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Subtest02
MAC Address Check
This subtest displays the MAC address. Selecting this subtest, following
message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : OK !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, following message will appear in the
display.
*************************************************************
ERROR: MAC all F
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : NG !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
3-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest03
Antenna check & communication test of 11b mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11b mode using the
main antenna first. If a defective is not found during the test,
transmitting/receiving test in 802.11b mode using the AUX antenna is
automatically executed.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message (which antenna is defective) is
displayed
**************************************
*
*
*
*
* Main Antenna Test : NG !!
*
**************************************
**************************************
*
*
*
*
* Aux Antenna Test : NG !!
*
**************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
Subtest04
Communication test of 11a mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11a mode using the
main antenna.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message is displayed
********************************************
*
*
*
*
11a Communication Test : NG !! *
*
********************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
Subtest05
Communication test of 11g mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11g mode using the
main antenna.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message is displayed
********************************************
*
*
*
*
11g Communication Test : NG !! *
*
********************************************
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Subtest06
All the tests of 11a/b/g Card
All the tests is executed in the order of SKU check of Module, MAC Address
Check, Communication test of 11b mode, Communication test of 11a mode
and Communication test of 11g mode.
When any error has detected, the test finishes.
3-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
This section describes how to perform the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test with the
test program.
Insert the test program disk for LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test in FDD and turn on
the power. The following message will appear:
Microsoft Windows XX Startup Menu
----------------------------------
1. LAN
2. Modem
3. Bluetooth
4. IEEE1394
Enter a choice:
Press the number you want to test and press Enter.
NOTE: It is impossible to go back to startup menu once you choose the test. Therefore,
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test can not be executed successively.
3.28.1
LAN test
To execute LAN test, press 1 and Enter. The following message will appear:
####################################################################
######### i82562 ICHx GbE (i82540) Diagnostics program
#####
####################################################################
*
*
* 1 ............ (i82562 + ICHx)
*
*
*
*
*
* 2 ............ (GbE)
*
********************************************************************
.... Press test number [1-2] ?
Press the number you want to test and press Enter.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
Subtest01
(i82562 + ICHx)
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the
chip.
The following message will appear:
[LAN transmit & receive test !]
COMPLETED Repeat count =
Error count =
00000
00000
LOOPBACK TEST
100Mbps Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
Destination Address
Source Address
= xxxxxxxxxxxx
= xxxxxxxxxxxx
** 100Base-TX Full-Duplex **
< TRANSMIT >
< RECEIVE >
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.
3-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest02
(GbE)
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the
chip. Select 2 to execute and press Enter.
The following message will appear:
Testing adaptor...hit <ESC> to abort.
*
External Loopback Test...PASSED
Testing completed.
*
*
Loopback Test Complete
*
*
* 1000Base Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
*
* CE Test Complete
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3.28.2
Modem test
For this subtest, connect the modem PCB and RJ11 connector with a harness. Use the
dedicated “FAT-MODE inspection device (product code: QE2000P01 made by Nitto Denki
Seisakusyo)” for the tests.
To execute Modem test, press 2 and Enter. Following message will appear:
[Modem loopback test !]
ICHx MDC Test Program with Modem Sound (Line Test)
Version X.X
* Scorpio Modem Initialize
* Digital Loopback Test
:OK
:OK
* RJ11 Connector Check (LED)
:(Operator’s Check!!)
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
RJ11 Connection Check (LED) (Operator’s Check LED) test will be executed, and the
following message will appear:
...Press Key (Y = OK , N =NG)
If the color in the LED of the connection checker is orange, press Y, otherwise, press N.
3-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28.3
Bluetooth test
To execute this test, press 3 and press Enter.
NOTE: Use another computer that can communicate by the Bluetooth as a reference
machine to perform this test.
Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the target machine and turn on the target
machine. The following Bluetooth test menu will appear:
######################################################################
####
Bluetooth sub system test program VX.XX
####
######################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1....BD_ADDR check
*
*
*
*
*
*
3... Communications test (DUT mode)
T....communications test (TEST mode)
**********************************************************************
....Press test number [1, 3, T] ?
Press 1 or 3 key to perform the corresponding subtest. To quit the Bluetooth test program,
eject the floppy disk and turn the computer off while the menu above is displayed.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
Subtest01
BD_ADDR check
This subtest checks the BD_ADDR functions. When the Bluetooth test menu
is displayed, press 1 to select the test and press Enter. The following message
will appear:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initializing …
When the machine has passed the test, it displays BD_ADDR. If BD_ADDR
has no problem, the following message is displayed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
My BD_ADDR = XXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
PPPPPP
A
SSSSS
SSSSS
SSSSS
SSSSS
P
P
P
A A
S
S S
S
S
P A
A S
PPPPPP A
A SSSSS
AAAAAAA
P
P
P
S
S
S
A
A
A S
A SSSSS
S S
3-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
If the target machine has any problem, it displays Error CODE. The following
message is displayed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
My BD_ADDR = XXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
FFFFFF
A
III
I
L
F
A A
L
F
A
A
I
L
FFFFFF A
A
I
L
F
F
F
AAAAAAA
I
L
A
A
A
A
I
L
III
LLLLLLL
Table 3-5 Error message
Message
Contents
Invalid BD_ADDR (all 00)
Invalid BD_ADDR (all FF)
Invalid BD_ADDR (bit0=1)
Invalid BD_ADDR (bit1=1)
Invalid BD_ADDR (define in the file)
0x000000000000
0xFFFFFFFFFFFF
bit40=1b
bit41=1b
Defined BD_ADDR
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
If the machine detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as shown
below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Error code
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) (1/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0a
0x0b
0x0c
0x0d
0x0e
0x0f
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1a
0x1b
0x1c
0x1d
0x1e
0x1f
Unknown HCI Command.
No Connection.
Hardware Failure.
Page Timeout.
Authentication Failure.
Key Missing.
Memory Full.
Connection Timeout.
Max Number Of Connections.
Max Number Of SCO Connections To A Device.
ACL Connection already exists.
Command Disallowed.
Host Rejected due to limited resources.
Host Rejected due to security reasons.
Host Rejected due to remote device is only a personal device.
Host Timeout.
Unsupported Feature or Parameter Value.
Invalid HCI Command Parameters.
Other End Terminated Connection: Used Ended Connection.
Other End Terminated Connection: Low Resources.
Other End Terminated Connection: About to Power Off.
Connection Terminated by Local Host.
Repeated Attempts.
Paring Not Allowed.
Unknown LMP PDU.
Unsupported Remote Feature.
SCO Offset Rejected.
SCO Interval Rejected.
SCO Air Mode Rejected.
Invalid LMP Parameters.
Unspecified Error.
See the Specification of the Bluetooth System for details.
3-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) (2/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2a
0x2b
0x2c
0x2d
0x2e
0x2f
Unsupported LMP Parameter Value.
Role Change Not Allowed.
LMP Response Timeout.
LMP Error Transaction Collision.
LMP PDU Not Allowed.
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.
Subtest03
Communication tests (DUT mode)
This subtest checks the Bluetooth communication functions. Preparing the tester machine for
the Bluetooth test program. Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the tester
machine and turn on the tester machine. The Bluetooth test menu will appear:
Press 3 to select the test and press Enter in the target machine. The following message will
appear:
When the test begins, the machine displays BD_ADDR of the DUT. The progress bar
stops when the test is completed. The following message is displayed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+----------------------+
|
DUT
|
BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
+----------------------+
Ready>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
<- Progress Bar
[ESC] : Stop
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
When the Bluetooth test menu is displayed, press T to select the test and press Enter in the
test machine. The following message will appear:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+------------------+
|
|
|
|
Tester
|
|
+------------------+
[ESC]:Finish Tester [SPACE]:Start
Is DUT ready?
Then press Space to start the Bluetooth communication test.
When the machine has passed the test, it displays BD_ADDR of the DUT. If the connection
with the tester is completed, the progress bar stops. The following message is shown.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+----------------------+
|
DUT
|
BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
+----------------------+
CCCC
CCCC
OOO
OOO
M
M PPPPPP L
EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE DDDDD
C
C
C O
O MM
MM P
P L
P L
E
T
E
E
D
D
D
D
C
C
C
O
O
O M M M M P
E
T
T
T
T
T
D
D
D
O M M M PPPPPP L
EEEEEE
EEEEEEE D
O
O M
O M
M
M P
M P
M P
L
L
E
E
E
E
D
D
C O
LLLLLLL EEEEEE
EEEEEEE DDDDD
Testing is finished
A>_
3-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
If the target machine has any problem, the following message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed
with the Error Code.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+----------------------+
|
DUT
|
BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
+----------------------+
III N
N
CCCC
CCCC
OOO
OOO
M
M PPPPPP L
EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE
I
NN
N N
N C
C O
O MM
MM P
P L
P L
E
T
E
I
I
I
I
N C
O
O
O M M M M P
E
T
T
T
T
T
E
N N N C
O M M M PPPPPP L
EEEEEE
EEEEEEE
N
N
N N C
NN C
N
O
O M
O M
M
M P
M P
M P
L
L
E
E
E
C O
E
III N
LLLLLLL EEEEEE
EEEEEEE
Testing is finished
_Press any key to continue. . .
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
If the machine detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as shown below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Error code
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (1/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0a
0x0b
0x0c
0x0d
0x0e
0x0f
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1a
0x1b
0x1c
0x1d
0x1e
0x1f
Unknown HCI Command.
No Connection.
Hardware Failure.
Page Timeout.
Authentication Failure.
Key Missing.
Memory Full.
Connection Timeout.
Max Number Of Connections.
Max Number Of SCO Connections To A Device.
ACL Connection already exists.
Command Disallowed.
Host Rejected due to limited resources.
Host Rejected due to security reasons.
Host Rejected due to remote device is only a personal device.
Host Timeout.
Unsupported Feature or Parameter Value.
Invalid HCI Command Parameters.
Other End Terminated Connection: Used Ended Connection.
Other End Terminated Connection: Low Resources.
Other End Terminated Connection: About to Power Off.
Connection Terminated by Local Host.
Repeated Attempts.
Paring Not Allowed.
Unknown LMP PDU.
Unsupported Remote Feature.
SCO Offset Rejected.
SCO Interval Rejected.
SCO Air Mode Rejected.
Invalid LMP Parameters.
Unspecified Error.
See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.
3-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (2/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2a
0x2b
0x2c
0x2d
0x2e
0x2f
Unsupported LMP Parameter Value.
Role Change Not Allowed.
LMP Response Timeout.
LMP Error Transaction Collision.
LMP PDU Not Allowed.
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
Table 3-8 Common error code
Error code
Meaning
0x30
0x31
0x32
0x33
0x34
0x35
0x36
0x37
0x38
0x39
0x3a
0x3b
0x3c
0x3d
0x3e
0x3f
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x45
0x46
0x47
0x48
0x49
0x4a
0x4b
0x4c
0x4d
0x4e
0x4f
BT Control Status should be “Disable”, but it is “Enable”.
BT Control Status should be “Enable”, but it is “Disable”.
Power Status should be “OFF”, but it is “ON”.
Power Status should be “ON”, but it is “OFF”.
USB I/F Status should be “Attach”, but it is “Detach”.
USB I/F Status should be “Detach”, but it is “Attach”.
Wake-up Status should be non-“Assert”, but it is “Assort”.
Wake-up Status should be “Assert”, but it is non-“Assort”.
Switch Status should be “OFF”, but it is “ON”.
Switch Status should be “ON”, but it is “OFF”.
Module dose not exist.
Module exists. (not error)
Command Line is wrong.
Side band access driver is not resident.
Bluetooth driver for DOS is not resident.
Get Status function of Side band access driver is not normal.
No reply to inquiry
Device Descriptor can not be acquired. USB I/F is not normal.
Sideband reset timeout occurs.
Descriptor type is wrong.
Descriptor is acquired in spite of Detach condition.
Configuration file open is not normal.
Contents of Configuration file are wrong.
BD_ADDR is wrong (00)
BD_ADDR is wrong (FF)
BD_ADDR is wrong (bit0=1)
BD_ADDR is wrong (bit1=1)
BD_ADDR is wrong (address defined as an error)
Suspended during Hard ware switch confirmation.
RSSI value is less than the standard value.
Holts
(reserved)
Number 0x30 to 0x40 are common error codes of the test program.
3-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28.4
IEEE1394 test
To execute this test, press 4 and Enter.
NOTE:
Use another computer that can communicate by IEEE1394 (i. Link) cable as a
reference machine to perform this test.
The following menu will appear:
********************************************************************
********
IEEE1394[XXXXX] Diagnostics program
**************
********************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ....(Transmit & Receive test)
2 ....(Responder set)
3 ....(1394 GUID Display)
********************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3] ?
To execute the TEST, select the test number you want to execute and press Enter.
Subtest01
Transmit & Receive test
NOTE:
Before executing subtest 01, be sure to execute subtest 02 in the responder
machine.
This program checks the data transporting between responder machine and
target machine and compare them with the original data through the
IEEE1394 cable.
Subtest 02
Subtest 03
Responder set
This program is executed in the responder machine to initialize the responder
machine with the IEEE1394 cable connected to the target machine before
executing subtest 01.
1394 GUID Display
This program checks the GUID of IEEE1394.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Sound Test program
3
Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Sound Test program
This section describes how to perform the Sound test. To execute the sound test, refer to the
following description.
Prepare a HDD and format it on DOS. Copy all files in the floppy disk in which the Sound
test program is stored to the HDD. Reboot the computer from the HDD. The following
message will appear:
###############################################################
######
WSS, Sound blaster pro Diagnostics program
#####
###############################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ............ Sound (Standard)
2 ............ Sound (Legacy)
3 ............ CD Sound (Standard)
4 ............ CD Sound (Legacy)
---It outputs at the speaker and lineout---
***************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-4] ?
Input the test number and press Enter.
3.29.1 Sound (Standard) test
To execute the Sound (Standard) test, press 1 and Enter. The following menu will appear in
the display.
###############################################################
######
ICH4-M + AD1981A Diagnostics program
######
###############################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ............
2 ............
3 ............
( Microphone recording & play )
( Sine wave )
( Line IN recording & play )
9 ............
Exit to Main
***************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3, 9] ?
3-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.29 Sound Test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
To return to the Sound test menu, press 9 and Enter. Then following message will appear in
the display.
***********************************
******** May I Restart ? *******
***********************************
Press any key to continue…
After pressing any key, the machine starts rebooting and sound test menu will appear in the
display.
Subtest 01
Microphone recording & play
This subtest checks the function of the CODEC A/D, D/A converter.
When this subtest is selected, the following message will appear.
[Recording & play test !]
And the following message will appear.
DOS/4GW Protected Mode Run-time Version X.XX
Copyright (c) Tenberry Software, Inc. XXXX
After this message appears, display stops briefly. In this timing, sound is
recorded from internal microphone.
After the recording is completed, the computer plays back the sound recorded
after the following message.
STACWAVE Version X.XX
Build data: XXX XX XXXX at XX:XX:XX
Loading “mic.wav”.
NOTE: The message in the display might have slight difference from those above.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Sound Test program
Subtest 02
Sine wave
This subtest is executed by loading the COM file (ADSIN.COM). The
program expands sine wave data table from 16KB to 64KB, and creates the
play data. Then it transfers the data between the DMA and the CODEC to
play the sine wave. (It sounds like a continuous beep). By using wave
measurable devices such as an oscilloscope, the data can be measured as a
sine wave.
When the subtest is executed, the sine wave is played while expanding sine
wave from 16KB to 64KB.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
Line IN recording & play
Subtest 03
This subtest executes the same test as the subtest01 by recorded sound from
the different port (Line-in port).
For more details on the subtest, refer to the subtest01 Microphone recording &
play.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
3.29.2 Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the Sound (Legacy) test, select 2 and press Enter.
NOTE: Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.
3-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.29 Sound Test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29.3 CD Sound (Standard) test
To execute the CD Sound (Standard) test, press 3 and Enter. Insert the test media
(TOSHIBA TEST CD-ROM or ABEX TEST CD-ROM) or music CD on the market (if the
test media can not be prepared). Following menu appears in the display.
For details on use of test media, refer to 3.28.3.1 Test media (Toshiba-made test media).
For details on use of audio CD on the market, refer to 3.28.3.2 Audio CD.
3.29.3.1 Test media (Toshiba-made test media)
xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
CD/DVD TEST IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
STATUS : XXX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
01 – Japanese Narration
02 – English Narration
03 – Test Tone A (100Hz – 20Hz)
04 - Test Tone B (400Hz – 3KHz L-R)
Drive # = 0, ATAPI status =00
Command = XX
[[Block address = XXXXXXXX]]
[[Block length = XXXXXXXX]]
Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX
Subtest 01
Japanese Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in Japanese starts and following message
appears in the display.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key <Play stop>.
Press any key and stop the narration. Then return to the CD Sound (Standard)
test menu.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Sound Test program
Subtest 02
English Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in English starts.
For more details on the procedure, refer to the subtest01.
Test Tone A
Subtest 03
CAUTION: Before starting subtest03, be sure to set the sound at proper volume.
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 100Hz to 20Hz.
The test returns to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.
Subtest 04
Test Tone B
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 400Hz to 3KHz
and also changing the channel from left speaker to right speaker.
The test returns to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.
CAUTION: This model does not support the CD Sound (Standard) test.
3-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.29 Sound Test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29.3.2 Audio CD
Insert an audio CD and the following menu appears in the display.
xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
CD/DVD TEST IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
; key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
STATUS : XXX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
CD Sound track number (01-98 : Track) ?
Drive # = 0, ATAPI status =00
Command = XX
[[Block address = XXXXXXXX]]
[[Block length = XXXXXXXX]]
Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX
Select the track number you want to test and press Enter twice.
The following message appears in the display and selected track is played.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key <play stop>
After pressing any key, the music stops and the display returns to the selection menu of the
track number.
NOTE:
When the CD-ROM test is executed, [ALL DEVICE] must be selected in the
“Device Config.=” of the BIOS SETUP. If the “ALL DEVICE” is not selected,
music can not be played.
3.29.4 CD Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the CD Sound (Legacy) test, select 4 and press Enter.
CAUTION: Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 SETUP
3.30 SETUP
3.30.1 Function Description
This program displays the current system setup information as listed below:
1. Memory
(a) Total
2. System Date/Time
(a) Date (MM-DD-YYYY)
(b) Time (HH:MM:SS)
3. Battery
(a) Battery Save Mode
(b) PCI Express Link ASPM
(c) Enhanced C-States
4. Password
5. HDD Password
(a) HDD
(b) HDD Password Mode
(c) User Password
(d) Master Password
6. Boot Priority
(a) Boot Priority
(b) HDD Priority
(c) Network Boot Protocol
7. Others
(a) Core Multi-Processing
(b) Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
(c) Execute-Disable Bit Capability
(d) Virtualization Technology
(e) Auto Power On
(f) Beep Volume
(g) Diagnostic Mode
(h) Language During Bootup
3-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
8. Configuration
(a) Device Config.
9. Drives I/O
(a) Built-in HDD
(b) CD-ROM
10. PCI Bus
(a) PCI Bus
11. Security Controller
(a) TPM
(b) Clear TPM Owner
12. Display
(a) Power On Display
(b) LCD Display Stretch
13. Peripheral
(a) Internal Pointing Device
14. Legacy Emulation
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
(c) USB Memory BIOS Support Type
15. PCI LAN
(a) Built-in LAN
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 SETUP
3.30.2 Accessing the SETUP Program
Turn on the power while pressing ESC, the following menu appears.
Check system. Then press [F1] key.
Then press F1. The following display appears.
NOTE: *1: This appears in Intel ® CoreTM models.
*2: This appears in PORTÉGÉ M500 (only PPM51) and TECRA M6.
*3: This appears in models that have 10/100M Ether Net LAN.
*4: This appears in models that have a CPU supporting TPM.
*5: This appears in models that have a CPU supporting this function.
3-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Moving Within the SETUP Menu and Changing Values
1. Press Å and Æ to move between the two columns. Press ↑ and ↓ to move between
items in a column. Press Fn+↑ (PgUp) and Fn + ↓ (PgDn) to move between the
two pages.
2. Press either the Space bar or Back Space to change the value.
Accepting Changes and Exiting the SETUP Window
1. Press End to accept the changes you made.
If the changed item does not require the system to reboot, the following message is
displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)
If the changed item requires the system to reboot, the following message is displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)
The changes you made will cause the system to reboot.
2. To make other changes, press N. Repeat the steps above.
3. To accept the changes, press Y.
NOTE: You can press Esc to quit at any time without saving changes. SETUP asks you
to confirm that you do not want to save your changes. When SETUP is displayed
at the next time, the current configuration appears.
The Factory Preset Configuration
When you access SETUP, the current configuration is displayed.
1. To show the factory preset configuration, press Home.
2. Press End and then press Y to accept the factory preset settings.
NOTE: When you execute the default setting, the following settings are not changed:
Password
Execute-Disable Bit function
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 SETUP
SETUP Options
The SETUP screen is divided into functionally related groups. This section describes each
group and its options.
1. Memory
This group of options displays the computer’s memory.
(a) Total
This field displays the total amount of memory installed and is automatically
calculated by the computer. You cannot change this value.
2. System Date/Time
Use this option to set the computer’s system date/time. Press ↓ to move the cursor to
the right and press ↑ to move the cursor to the left. Press the space bar to increase
the number and press BkSp to decrease the number.
(a) Date
Use this option to set the system date of the computer.
(b) Time
Use this option to set the system time of the computer.
3. Battery
This option is used to select Full Power, Low Power or User Setting of the battery
save mode.
Full Power
The following shows full power settings.
3-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Low Power
The following shows low power settings.
(a) Battery Save Mode
When “User Setting” is selected, the sub-window, BATTERY SAVE
OPTION is displayed. The following set of options can be selected in the
submenu.
Processing Speed
This feature changes the CPU processing speed.
High
Low
CPU operates at high speed. (Default)
CPU operates at low speed.
CPU Sleep Mode
Use this option to enable or disable the CPU sleep function.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables sleep mode. (Default)
Disables sleep mode.
LCD Brightness
Use this option to set the level of LCD brightness.
Super-Bright
Bright
Full brightness for maximum visibility.
Full brightness for high visibility. (Default)
Less than full brightness for saving power.
Semi-Bright
Cooling Method
If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on or the processing speed is
lowered automatically. When the CPU temperature falls to a normal range, the
fan turns off.
Maximum performance
Turns on the fan first, and if necessary, lowers
CPU processing speed. (Default)
Battery optimized
Lowers the CPU processing speed first, and if
necessary, turns on the fan.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 SETUP
(b) PCI Express Link ASPM
Enabled
Saves power consumption, when the PCI Express device is not
used. (Default)
Auto
Saves power consumption, when the PCI Express device is not
used while the battery is working.
Disabled
Disables the power saving function and gives priority to the
performance.
(c) Enhanced C-States
This feature enables or disables the Enhanced C-States.
Enabled
Disabled
This lowers the power consumption.
This does not lower the power consumption.
4. Password
This option allows you to set or reset the user password for power on.
Not Registered Change or remove the password. (Default)
For details on setting the user password, refer to the User’s Manual.
5. HDD Password
This option sets HDD password. HDD password is a security function to protect the
built-in HDD.
(a) HDD
This item selects the hard disk to set HDD password.
Built-in HDD
Sets HDD password for the built-in HDD
(b) HDD Password Mode
This item registers HDD password and can be selected only for registering
HDD password. To change HDD Password Mode when HDD password is
registered, delete the registered HDD password first, and then register new
password.
User Only
Sets only User HDD Password (Default)
Master+User
Sets Master HDD Password and User HDD Password
3-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
(c) User Password
This item sets User password.
For details on setting user password, refer to the User’s Manual.
(d) Master Password
This item sets the Master HDD password.
This can be set Master+User is set in the HDD password Mode. For details,
refer to the User’s Manual.
6. Boot Priority
This tab sets the priority for booting the computer and the priority for the built-in
HDD or optional secondary HDD.
(a) Boot Priority
HDD→FDD→CD-ROM→LAN: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: HDD, FDD, CD-
ROM and LAN. (Default)
FDD→HDD→CD-ROM→LAN: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: FDD, HDD, CD-
ROM and LAN.
HDD→CD-ROM→LAN→FDD: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: HDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and FDD.
FDD→CD-ROM→LAN→HDD: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: FDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and HDD.
CD-ROM→LAN→HDD→FDD: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
HDD and FDD.
CD-ROM→LAN→FDD→HDD: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
FDD and HDD.
NOTE: CD-ROM refers to a DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive or DVD Super Multi drive.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 SETUP
(b) HDD Priority
This option enables to select the priority for the Built-in HDD or USB.
Built-in HDD→ USB (Default)
USB → Built-in HDD
(c) Network Boot Protocol
Use this option to set the starting method via a network.
PXE Sets to PXE protocol. (Default)
RPL Sets to RPL protocol.
7. Others
Whether or not you need to configure the computer with these options depends
primarily on the kind of software or peripherals you use.
(a) Core-Multi Processing
The Core Multi-Processing sets the CPU operating mode of Core Multi-
Processor.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables Core Multi-Processing functions. (Default)
Disables Core Multi-Processing functions.
(b) Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
Use this option to choose a setting from the followings.
Dynamically Switchable
Enables Intel SpeedStep technology. When the computer is
in use, the CPU power consumption and clock speed are
automatically switched when necessary. (Default)
Always High
Always Low
Disables Intel SpeedStep technology and always runs the
processor at its fastest speed.
Disables Intel SpeedStep technology and always runs the
processor at low power consumption and low speed.
3-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
(c) Execute-Disable Bit Capability
Selects the function to reports whether the CPU Execute-Disable Bit is
available or not to OS. When the CMOS is damaged, the default is Available.
When Home is pressed, the setting is not changed and the setting is kept.
Available
Reports that the function is available.
Not Available
Reports that the function is not available. (Default)
(d) Virtualization Technology
Virtualization Technology sets enable or disable of the Intel Virtualization
Technology installed in the CPU.
Intel Virtualization Technology is the technique that allows one machine to
operate as multiple virtual machines.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables Virtualization Technology.
Disables Virtualization Technology. (Default)
(e) Auto Power On
Use this option to set a time and date for automatic power on and enable or
disable the ring indicator feature. Alarm Date Option appears only when
Alarm Time is enabled.
OPTIONS
Alarm Time
Alarm Date Option
Wake-up on LAN
= 00:00:00
= Disabled
= Disabled*
*Only for LAN Model
Alarm Time is set in the sequence of hours and minutes. Seconds cannot be
changed. Alarm Date Option is set in the sequence of month and day. If
Alarm Date is set to Disabled, the computer will be powered on at the same
time every day. Press ↓ to move the cursor to the right and ↑ to move the
cursor to the left when you set the date and time.
NOTE: 1. Do not remove the AC adapter and battery pack at the same time when you use
this feature. If you do so, data saved by the resume function will be lost. You
must also reset this option.
2. When a password is set in Password Security, the system is in standby mode,
the Timer on function (Auto Power PN) is set and the system is booted,
“Password =” is displayed. When the password set in Password Security is
input, the computer returns to Windows from standby mode.
3. This function is effective only once, it is released after booting up.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 SETUP
(f) Beep Volume
This option selects the volume of beep (Warning). “OFF”, “Low”, “Medium”
(Default) or “High” can be selected. If a memory module that does not comply
with the standards, the computer beeps at maximum volume.
(g) Diagnostic Mode
This option sets whether the BIOS Setup Diagnostic test is enabled.
Disabled
Enabled
The Diagnostic test is disabled. (Default)
The Diagnostic test is enabled.
(h) Language During Bootup
This option selects the language during bootup. This message appears only on
the model for TCL (Canada).
English
French
The message is displayed in English. (Default)
The message is displayed in French.
8. Configuration
This option displays the configuration method.
(a) Device Config.
The devices are initialized when the PNP OS loads.
Setup by OS
First, devices necessary for loading the OS will be
initialized. After the PNP OS loads, the OS will
initialize other devices. In this case, setup of PC Cards
will be fixed to “Auto-Selected” and cannot be
changed. (Default)
All Devices
All devices will be initialized.
If you are using an OS that does not have PNP capacity, select “All Devices.”
The Display shows the following message:
Device Config. = All Devices
3-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
9. Drives I/O
This option displays the address/interrupt level for hard disk drive and optical drive.
It is only for information and cannot be changed.
(a) Built-in HDD
This option displays the setting of the address and interrupt level of the HDD.
This cannot be changed.
(b) CD-ROM
This option displays the setting of the address and interrupt level of the
installed drive. This cannot be changed. Even if an installed drive is not CD-
ROM drive, “CD-ROM” is displayed.
10. PCI Bus
This item displays the interrupt level for the Card Bus. It is for information only and
cannot be changed.
PCI BUS = IRQ10, IRQ11
11. Security controller
(a) TPM
Disables the security controller called TPM (Trusted Platform Module).
When the cursor is on the Enable (Disable) and the Space is pressed,
message is displayed and the PC waits Y or N key input by the user.
When Y is pressed, it is sets to Enable (Disable). After changing, the cursor
could not be moved on the TPM tem. This option can be changed after
rebooting.
Disabled
Enabled
Disables the TPM. (Default)
Enables the TPM.
(b) Clear TPM Owner
This is not displayed when the TPM is set to Disabled. This is executed,
when the PC is disposed or the owner of the PC changes.
When the cursor is on this item and the Space is pressed, message is
displayed and the PC waits Y, E, S and Enter key inputs by the user.
When Y, E, S and Enter keys are pressed, the data is disposed.
After changing, the display of TPM item is changed to Disabled and this item
becomes not displayed and the cursor could not be moved on the TPM item.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 SETUP
12. Display
This group of options configures the computer’s display.
(a) Power On Display
This option is used to select the display when booting up.
Auto-Selected
Selects an external monitor if one is connected.
Otherwise it selects the internal LCD. (Default)
LCD+AnalogRGB Selects both the internal LCD and the external monitor
for simultaneous display.
NOTE: Pressing Fn+F5 changes the display setting in the order of internal LCD to
simultaneous to external monitor.
(b) LCD Display Stretch
LCD Display Stretch enables or disables a larger display area of the screen.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables the LCD display stretch feature. (Default)
Disables the LCD display stretch feature.
13. Peripheral
Use this option to select the parallel port mode and hard disk mode.
(a) Internal Pointing Device
This option enables and disables the Touch Pad.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables the Touch Pad. (Default)
Disables the Touch Pad.
3-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
14. Legacy Emulation.
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation.
Use this option to enable or disable USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation. If
your operating system does not support USB, you can still use a USB mouse
and keyboard by setting the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation item to
Enabled.
Enabled
Disabled
USB Legacy Support can be used. (Default)
USB Legacy Support cannot be used.
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.
Use this option to enable or disable USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.
Enabled
Disabled
USB Legacy Support can be used. (Default)
USB Legacy Support cannot be used.
(c) USB Memory BIOS Support Type
Sets the type of the USB memory as a startup device.
HDD
Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent to the HDD
(Default).
Based on the [HDD] order in the [Boot Priority Options] item.
The order with respect to the other HDD can be set in the
[HDD Priority Options] item.
FDD
Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent to the FDD.
Based on the [FDD] order in the [Boot Priority Options] item.
15. PCI LAN
This option enables/disables the Built-in LAN functions.
(a) Built-in LAN
Enabled
Disabled
Enables Built-in LAN functions. (Default)
Disables Built-in LAN functions.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 SETUP
3-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Replacement Procedures
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4-ii
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
Chapter 4
Contents
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
General....................................................................................................................... 4-1
Battery pack ............................................................................................................... 4-8
PC card..................................................................................................................... 4-10
Bridge media............................................................................................................ 4-11
HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-12
Optical drive ............................................................................................................ 4-15
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-18
Memory module....................................................................................................... 4-21
Cover FAT assembly ............................................................................................... 4-23
4.10 Fingerprint sensor board .......................................................................................... 4-28
4.11 Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-30
4.12 SW membrane.......................................................................................................... 4-32
4.13 Bluetooth module..................................................................................................... 4-34
4.14 Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-36
4.15 MDC (Modem Daughter Card)................................................................................ 4-38
4.16 Internal microphone................................................................................................. 4-40
4.17 RTC battery ............................................................................................................. 4-42
4.18 Harness holder/LAN cable....................................................................................... 4-44
4.19 System board/DC-IN jack........................................................................................ 4-47
4.20 Modem jack/Wireless communication SW ............................................................. 4-50
4.21 Fan/CPU................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.22 HDD cable/PC card slot........................................................................................... 4-57
4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter............................................................................................... 4-59
4.24 Speaker/LCD cable.................................................................................................. 4-65
4.25 Cover latch............................................................................................................... 4-67
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna .............................................................. 4-68
4.27 Hinge........................................................................................................................ 4-70
4.28 Battery slider............................................................................................................ 4-72
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp..................................................................................................... 4-73
4.29.1 Replacing the 12.1-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp ................ 4-74
4.29.2 Replacing the 12.1-inch WXGA Samsung Fluorescent Lamp........... 4-85
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
Figures
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Removing the battery pack ............................................................................ 4-8
Removing the PC card ................................................................................ 4-10
Removing the Bridge media (SD card) ....................................................... 4-11
Removing the HDD cover ........................................................................... 4-12
Separating the HDD and HDD holder ......................................................... 4-13
Removing the optical drive.......................................................................... 4-15
Disassembling the optical drive................................................................... 4-16
Removing the keyboard holder.................................................................... 4-18
Removing the keyboard support plate ......................................................... 4-19
Figure 4-10 Removing the memory module.................................................................... 4-21
Figure 4-11 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (1)...................................................... 4-23
Figure 4-12 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (2)...................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-13 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (3)...................................................... 4-25
Figure 4-14 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (4)...................................................... 4-26
Figure 4-15 Removing the fingerprint sensor board ....................................................... 4-28
Figure 4-16 Removing the touch pad assembly .............................................................. 4-30
Figure 4-17 Removing the SW membrane (1) ................................................................ 4-32
Figure 4-18 Removing the SW membrane (2) ................................................................ 4-33
Figure 4-19 Removing the Bluetooth module ................................................................. 4-34
Figure 4-20 Removing the wireless LAN card................................................................ 4-36
Figure 4-21 Removing the MDC (Modem Daughter Card)............................................ 4-38
Figure 4-22 Removing the internal microphone.............................................................. 4-40
Figure 4-23 Removing the RTC battery.......................................................................... 4-43
Figure 4-24 Removing the Harness holder/LAN cable (1) ............................................. 4-44
Figure 4-25 Removing the Harness holder/LAN cable (2) ............................................. 4-45
Figure 4-26 Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (1)............................................. 4-47
Figure 4-27 Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (2)............................................. 4-48
Figure 4-28 Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (3)............................................. 4-48
Figure 4-29 Removing the Modem jack.......................................................................... 4-50
Figure 4-30 Removing the wireless communication SW............................................... 4-51
4-iv
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
Figure 4-31 Removing the CPU holder........................................................................... 4-53
Figure 4-32 Removing the fan......................................................................................... 4-54
Figure 4-33 Removing the CPU ...................................................................................... 4-54
Figure 4-34 Installing the CPU........................................................................................ 4-55
Figure 4-35 Applying new grease ................................................................................... 4-56
Figure 4-36 Removing the HDD cable............................................................................ 4-57
Figure 4-37 Removing the PC card slot .......................................................................... 4-58
Figure 4-38 Removing the display assembly................................................................... 4-59
Figure 4-39 Removing the LCD mask............................................................................. 4-60
Figure 4-40 Removing the FL inverter............................................................................ 4-61
Figure 4-41 Removing the LCD unit............................................................................... 4-62
Figure 4-42 Removing the LCD support......................................................................... 4-63
Figure 4-43 Removing the speaker.................................................................................. 4-65
Figure 4-44 Removing the LCD cable............................................................................. 4-66
Figure 4-45 Removing the cover latch ............................................................................ 4-67
Figure 4-46 Removing the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna............................ 4-68
Figure 4-47 Removing the hinge..................................................................................... 4-70
Figure 4-48 Removing the battery slider......................................................................... 4-72
Figure 4-49 to 4-58 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (1) to (10).........................4-75 to 4-84
Figure 4-59 to 4-62 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (1) to (4) .................. 4-85 to 4-87
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4-vi
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 General
4 Replacement Procedures
4
Replacement Procedures
4.1 General
This section explains how to disassemble the computer and replace Field Replaceable Units
(FRUs). It may not be necessary to remove all the FRUs in order to replace one. The chart
below is a guide to which FRUs need to be removed in order to remove others. Always start
by removing the battery pack, next, optional items such as the optional PC card and optional
SD card, then follow the line on the chart to determine which FRU you must remove next in
order to repair the one you think is causing the computer to operate improperly. Refer to the
example at the bottom of the page.
How to see the chart:
This chart shows
which unit(s) you
need to remove in
advance when you
replace one unit.
Example:
When you wan to
replace touch pad, you
need to remove units,
in the hatched boxes
above the boxes in
which the touch pad
is.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 General
Safety Precautions
Before you begin disassembly, read the following safety precautions and observe them
carefully as you work.
DANGER: 1) Always use the genuine battery that is authorized by Toshiba or
compatible with the unit. Since other battery packs have different
specifications, they may be incompatible with the unit, and may burst or
explode.
Never heat or disassemble the battery pack, as that could cause leakage
of alkaline solution. Never throw the battery pack into a fire, as that
could cause the battery pack to explode.
2) The power supply, FL inverter and other components carry high
voltages. If you need to turn on the power of a partially disassembled
computer to check its operation, be very careful not to touch connectors
or components, in order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Also, do not disassemble individual components in first-level
maintenance.
WARNING: 1) Turn off the power and disconnect the AC adaptor from the power
source, to avoid exposure to electric shock.
2) Batteries in the computer retain an electrical charge, so there is danger
of electrical shock even when the computer is disconnected from an AC
power source. Remove any metal jewelry or accessories such as
necklaces, bracelets or rings, in order to reduce the risk of electric
shock. Never work with wet or damp hands.
3) Be careful of edges and corners as these may cut.
CAUTION: 1) When you change a component, be sure the replacement component
meets the required specifications. Never use foreign parts, to avoid any
risk of damage to the computer.
2) To avoid any risk of short-circuit, fire or other internal damage, never
allow any metal objects such as screws or paper clips to fall into the
unit. Be sure to replace screws with the same size as those removed.
Make sure all screws are securely fastened. Loose screws can cause
short circuits, resulting in heat, smoke or fire.
3) Before lifting out an FRU or other component, make sure all cables to
the component have been disconnected, in order to reduce the risk of
accidental electric shock.
4) If you use AC power, be sure to use the cable that came with the
computer or one recommended by Toshiba.
5) Make sure that all replacement components meet the specifications for
the computer and that all cables and connectors are securely fastened, in
order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
6) Some parts inside the computer, such as the CPU and cooling module,
become very hot during operation. Conduct repair work after they have
cooled. Be careful around the CPU and cooling module to avoid burns.
4-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 General
4 Replacement Procedures
Before You Begin
Look over the procedures in this section before you begin disassembling the computer.
Familiarize yourself with the disassembly and reassembly steps. Begin each procedure by
removing the AC adapter and the battery pack as instructed in this section:
1. Do not disassemble the computer unless it is operating abnormally.
2. Use only the correct and approved tools.
3. Make sure the working environment is free from the following elements whether you
are using or storing the computer.
• Dust and contaminates
• Static electricity
• Extreme heat, cold and humidity
4. Make sure the FRU you are replacing is causing the abnormal operation by
performing the necessary diagnostics tests described in this manual.
5. Do not perform any operations that are not necessary and use only the described
procedures for disassembling and installing FRUs in the computer.
6. After removing parts from the computer, place them in a safe place away from the
computer so they will not be damaged and will not interfere with your work.
7. You will remove and replace many screws when you disassemble the computer.
When you remove screws, make sure they are placed in a safe place and identified
with the correct parts.
8. When assembling the computer make sure you use the correct screws to secure the
various pieces in place. Screw sizes are listed in their corresponding figures.
9. The computer contains many sharp edges and corners, so be careful not to injure
yourself.
10. After you have replaced an FRU, make sure the computer is functioning properly by
performing the appropriate test on the FRU you have fixed or replaced.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 General
Disassembly Procedures
The computer has two basic types of cable connectors:
• Pressure Plate Connectors
• Coaxial Cable Connectors
• Normal Pin Connectors
To disconnect a Pressure Plate connector, lift up the tabs on either side of the connector’s
plastic pressure plate and slide the cable out of the connector. To connect the cable to a
Pressure Plate connector, make sure the pressure plate is fully lifted and slide the cable into
the connector. Secure the cable in place by pushing the sides of the pressure plate down so
the plate is flush with the sides of the connector. Gently pull on the cable to make sure the
cable is secure. If you pull out the connector, connect it again making sure the connector’s
pressure plate is fully lifted when you insert the cable.
Coaxial cables should be disconnected with an antenna coaxial disconnector.
Normal Pin connectors are used with all other cables. These connectors can be connected
and disconnected by simply pulling them apart or pushing them together.
Assembly Procedures
After you have disassembled the computer and fixed or repaired the problem that was
causing the computer to operate abnormally, you will need to reassemble the computer.
Install all the removed FRUs following the steps described in the corresponding sections in
this chapter.
While assembling the computer, remember the following general points:
• Take your time, making sure you follow the instructions closely. Most problems
arise when you get in a hurry assembling the computer.
• Make sure all cables and connectors are securely fastened.
• Before securing the FRU or other parts, make sure that screws or the FRU will
pinch no cables.
• Check that all latches are closed securely in place.
• Make sure all the correct screws are used to secure all FRUs. Using the wrong
screw can either damage the threads on the screw or the head of the screw and
may prevent proper seating of an FRU.
After installing an FRU in the computer, confirm that the FRU and the computer are
functioning properly.
4-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 General
4 Replacement Procedures
Tools and Equipment
The use of Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) equipment is very important for your safety and the
safety of those around you. Proper use of these devices will increase the success rate of your
repairs and lower the cost for damaged or destroyed parts. The following equipment is
necessary to disassemble and reassemble the computer:
• One M2 point size 0 Phillips screwdriver
• One M2.5/M3 point size 1 Phillips screwdriver
• One screw driver for stud screw
• One 4 mm flat-blade screwdriver
• Tweezers, to lift out screws that you cannot grasp with your fingers
• ESD mats for the floor and the table you are working on
• An ESD wrist strap or heel grounder
• Anti-static carpeting or flooring
• Air ionizers in highly static sensitive areas
• Plastic card of the size of credit card
• Antenna coaxial cable disconnector
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 General
Screw Tightening Torque
When you fasten screws, be sure to follow the torque list below.
CAUTION: Overtightening can damage components and screws; undertightening can
result in electrical shorts or other damage if screws or components come
loose.
NOTE: Toshiba recommends that you use an electric screw driver for quick and easy
operations.
• M2
• M2.5
• M3
0.167 N·m (1.7 kgf·cm)
0.294 N·m (3.0 kgf·cm)
0.549 N·m (5.6 kgf·cm)
NOTE: The computer contains several flat head screws. These screws have less contact
area with the screwdriver, so be careful to press firmly enough to prevent the
screwdriver from slipping out and damaging the screw head.
4-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 General
4 Replacement Procedures
Color of Screw Shaft
To avoid mistakes on the screw length, screw shafts are colored as follows:
‰ Even number length screw:
‰ Odd number length screw:
‰ Special length screw:
brown
white
blue
Screws whose lengths are indicated to one or more decimal places such as 2.5 mm or 2.8 mm.
Marking of Screws on the Computer Body
To make maintenance of the computer easier, markings of the kinds of the screws including
the types and lengths of the screws are indicated on the computer body.
Kind of screws
‰ BIND screw
Symbol
B
F
‰ FLAT HEAD screw
‰ SUPER THIN HEAD screw
‰ TAPPING screw
S
T
U
‰ Other screws
(Unique screws, STUD, etc.)
Examples:
‰ 6 mm BIND screw
B6
‰ 12 mm BIND screw
‰ 4 mm FLAT HEAD screw
B12
F4
(Indicates the screwed length in round number regardless the length of the stud.)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.2 Battery pack
4.2 Battery pack
Removing the Battery pack
To remove the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-1.
CAUTION: When handling battery packs, be careful not to short circuit the terminals.
Also do not drop, hit or apply impact, do not scratch, break, twist or bend
the battery pack.
1. Turn off the power of the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC adapter and other external devices from the computer.
3. Turn the computer face down.
4. Release the battery lock. Pull out the battery pack while sliding the battery latch
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE: For environmental reasons, do not throw away a spent battery pack.
Battery latch
Battery lock
Battery pack
Figure 4-1 Removing the battery pack
4-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 Battery pack
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Battery pack
To install the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-1.
CAUTION: The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode if not properly
replaced, used, handled or disposed of. For environmental reasons, collect
the spent battery packs. Use only batteries recommended by Toshiba for
replacements.
NOTE: Check the battery’s terminals visually. If they are dirty, wipe them clean with a
dry cloth.
1. Turn off the power of the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC adapter and all other external devices to the computer.
3. Push the battery pack into the battery slot. Make sure the battery pack is installed
securely.
4. Slide the battery lock into the lock position.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.3 PC card
4.3 PC card
Removing the PC card
To remove the PC card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-2.
CAUTION: Before you remove the PC card, refer to the card’s documentation and to
your operating system documentation for proper procedures and
precautions.
1. Press the eject button for the PC card you want to remove to extend the button.
2. Press the extended eject button to pop the PC card out.
3. Grasp the PC card and pull it out.
PC card
Eject button
Figure 4-2 Removing the PC card
Installing the PC card
To install the PC card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-2.
1. Insert the PC card into the card slot.
2. Push it carefully to ensure a firm connection.
4-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Bridge media
4 Replacement Procedures
4.4 Bridge media
Removing the Bridge media
To remove the Bridge media, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-3.
CAUTION: Before you remove the Bridge media, refer to the card’s documentation and
to your operating system documentation for proper procedures and
precautions.
1. Push the Bridge media in and release it to pop the card out.
2. Grasp the Bridge media and pull it out.
(For an instance, SD card is described in the figure 4-3.)
Bridge media
(SD card)
Figure 4-3 Removing the Bridge media (SD card)
Installing the Bridge media
To install the Bridge media, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-3.
1. Insert the Bridge media in the card slot.
2. Push it carefully to ensure a firm connection.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.5 HDD
4.5 HDD
CAUTION: When handling the HDD, do not press the top surface as shown by the arrow.
Hold it by the sides.
Removing the HDD
To remove the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-4 and 4-5.
1. Turn the computer upside down.
2. Loosen the screw (with an e-ring) and remove the HDD cover while releasing latches.
3. Pull the tab of the HDD assembly to remove it from the connector of the HDD cable.
Be careful not to damage the connector.
HDD cover
Screw (e-ring)
HDD assembly
Tab
Figure 4-4 Removing the HDD cover
4-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5 HDD
4 Replacement Procedures
NOTE: The following steps describe how to disassemble the HDD assembly, however, do
not disassemble if the HDD is working properly.
4. Place the HDD assembly on a flat surface, and remove the following screws.
• M3×4S
FLAT HEAD screw
×4
5. Separate the HDD and HDD Holder.
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the top or bottom of the HDD.
M3×4S FLAT HEAD
HDD Holder
M3×4S FLAT HEAD
HDD
Figure 4-5 Separating the HDD and HDD holder
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.5 HDD
Installing the HDD
To install the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-4 and 4-5.
CAUTION: Do not hold the HDD by its top and bottom flat surfaces. It may damage the
HDD.
1. Seat the HDD in the HDD Holder and secure them with the following screws.
• M3×4S
FLAT HEAD screw
×4
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the center of the HDD assembly. It may damage
the HDD assembly. Hold the HDD assembly by its corners.
2. Set the connector of the HDD cable upward and connect firmly the HDD assembly
to the connector. Lay the HDD assembly down in the slot.
3. Set the HDD cover and secure it with the screw (with an e-ring).
4-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6 Optical drive
4 Replacement Procedures
4.6 Optical drive
Removing the Optical drive
To remove the optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-6 and 4-7.
CAUTION: Do not put fingers in the optical drive. It may cause injury.
1. Remove the following two screws securing the slim select.
• M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
• M2.5×16B FLAT HEAD screw
×1
2. While sliding the hook in the direction of the arrow in the figure below, remove the
optical drive (from connector on the system board).
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
M2.5×16B FLAT HEAD
Hook
Optical drive
Figure 4-6 Removing the optical drive
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.6 Optical drive
3. Remove the following screw and the pushing plate.
• M2×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
4. Remove the following screws and the mounting plate.
• M2×3B BIND screw
×1
Mounting plate
Pushing plate
M2×3B BIND
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD
Figure 4-7 Disassembling the optical drive
4-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6 Optical drive
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Optical drive
To install the optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-6 and 4-7.
1. Set the mounting plate and secure it with the following screw.
• M2×3B
BIND screw
×1
2. Set the pushing plate and secure it with the following screws.
• M2×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
3. Insert the optical drive firmly into the computer to connect it to the connector on the
system board.
4. Secure the optical drive with the following screws.
• M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD screw
×1
• M2.5×16B FLAT HEAD screw
×1
CAUTION: When inserting the slim select bay module, turn the computer face up and
insert it while slightly pressing it down.
Optical drive
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.7 Keyboard
4.7 Keyboard
Removing the Keyboard
To remove the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-8 and 4-9.
1. Turn over the computer and open the display.
2. Insert your fingers into the slits on both sides and lift up the keyboard holder to
remove.
3. Remove the following screws securing the keyboard.
• M2×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
Keyboard holder
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD
Figure 4-8 Removing the keyboard holder
4-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7 Keyboard
4 Replacement Procedures
4. Remove the following screws and keyboard support plate.
• M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD screw ×1
5. Disconnect the keyboard cable from the connector CN3230 on the system board and
remove the keyboard.
M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD
Keyboard
Keyboard support plate
Keyboard cable
CN3230
Figure 4-9 Removing the keyboard support plate
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.7 Keyboard
Installing the Keyboard
To install the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-8 and 4-9.
1. Place the keyboard face down on the palm rest.
2. Connect the keyboard cable to the connector CN3230 on the system board.
3. Install the keyboard support plate and secure it with the following screw.
• M2.5×8B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
4. Turn the keyboard face up and set it in place.
5. Secure the keyboard with the following screws.
• M2×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
6. Install the keyboard holder and press to secure the latches.
4-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8 Memory module
4 Replacement Procedures
4.8 Memory module
Removing the Memory module
CAUTION: The power must be turned off when you remove or insert a memory module.
Inserting a memory module with the power on might damage the module or
the computer itself.
Never press hard or bend the memory module.
To remove the memory module, make sure the computer is in boot mode and powered off,
follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-10.
1. Remove the following screws and memory cover.
• M2.5×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
2. Press two latches outward to release them.
3. Grasp both sides of the memory module and lift it up slantwise to remove.
M2.5×3S S-THIN HEAD
Memory cover
Memory module A
Latch
Latch
Memory module B
Figure 4-10 Removing the memory module
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.8 Memory module
Installing the Memory module
To install the memory module, make sure that the computer is in boot mode and powered off,
follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-10.
CAUTION: When installing only one memory module, be sure to insert it into the slot A.
Otherwise, the computer or the memory may not work properly.
Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer.
Dust and stains on the connectors may cause memory access problems.
1. Insert the memory module into the connector slantwise and press it to connect firmly.
2. Press down the memory module until it is latched firmly.
3. Seat the memory cover and secure it with the following screws.
• M2.5×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
NOTE: When the power of computer is turned on, the computer checks automatically the
memory size. Confirm that the new memory is detected correctly.
If the memory is not detected, check that it is connected correctly.
4-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.9 Cover FAT assembly
4 Replacement Procedures
4
Replacement Procedures
4.9 Cover FAT assembly
Removing the Cover FAT assembly
To remove the Cover FAT assembly, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-11 to 4-14.
1. Peel off the insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer and
disconnect the SW membrane cable from the connector CN3260 on the system
board.
2. Peel off the insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer and
disconnect the touch pad cable and fingerprint sensor cable from the connector
CN3240 and CN9520 on the system board.
Insulator
Insulator
SW membrane cable
CN9520
CN3260
Fingerprint
sensor cable
CN3240
Touch pad cable
Figure 4-11 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (1)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.9 Cover FAT assembly
3. Remove following screws.
• M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD screw
×2
M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD
Figure 4-12 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (2)
4-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.9 Cover FAT assembly
4 Replacement Procedures
4. Turn the computer face down and remove the following screws on the bottom.
• M2.5×8B
FLAT HEAD screw
×7 (“8” in the figure below)
• M2.5×16B FLAT HEAD screw
×1 (“16” in the figure below)
8
16
8
8
8
8
8
8
Figure 4-13 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (3)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.9 Cover FAT assembly
5. Turn the computer face up and open the display.
6. While releasing the latches on both sides lift up the Cover FAT assembly to remove.
Cover FAT assembly
Figure 4-14 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (4)
4-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.9 Cover FAT assembly
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Cover FAT assembly
To install the Cover FAT assembly, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-11 to 4-14.
1. Place the Cover FAT assembly on the base assembly and secure the latches.
CAUTION: When installing Cover FAT assembly, insert the guides of the cover FAT
assembly into the base as shown in the following figure.
2. Secure the Cover FAT assembly with the following screws.
• M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD screw
×2
3. Turn the computer face up.
4. Connect the SW membrane cable to the connector CN3260 on the system board and
stick a new insulator.
5. Connect the touch pad cable and fingerprint sensor cable to the connector CN3240
and CN9520 on the system board and stick a new insulator.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the removed insulators.
6. Close the display and turn the computer face down. Secure the Cover FAT assembly
with the following screws.
• M2.5×8B
FLAT HEAD screw
×7
• M2.5×16B FLAT HEAD screw
×1
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.10 Fingerprint sensor board
4.10 Fingerprint sensor board
Removing the Fingerprint sensor board
To remove the fingerprint sensor board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-15.
1. Lift up the hook and remove the bracket while sliding it in the direction of arrow in
the figure below.
2. Remove the fingerprint sensor board fixed with the double-sided tape and peel off
the tape that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
3. Disconnect the fingerprint sensor cable from the connector on the fingerprint sensor
board.
Fingerprint sensor cable
Hook
Bracket
Guide
Fingerprint sensor board
Guide
Double-sided tape
Figure 4-15 Removing the fingerprint sensor board
4-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.10 Fingerprint sensor board
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Fingerprint sensor board
To install the fingerprint sensor board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-15.
1. Connect the fingerprint sensor cable to the connector on the fingerprint sensor
board.
2. Stick a new double-sided tape in place and install the fingerprint sensor board
while inserting it under the guides.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the removed double-sided tape.
3. Place the bracket while sliding it under the guides and inserting the slit into the
guide.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.11 Touch pad
4.11 Touch pad
Removing the Touch pad
To remove the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-16.
1. Remove the following screws securing the touch pad assembly.
• M2×4B
BIND screw
×4
2. Remove the touch pad cover and touch pad (fixed with the double sided tape).
3. Peel off the double-sided tape that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
4. Remove the fingerprint sensor cable on the touch pad.
5. Open the insulator and disconnect touch pad cable from the touch pad assembly.
M2×4B BIND
Touch pad cover
Fingerprint sensor cable
M2×4B BIND
Insulator
Touch pad cable
Double-sided tape
Touch pad
Figure 4-16 Removing the touch pad assembly
4-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.11 Touch pad
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Touch pad
To install the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-16.
1. Open the insulator and connect the touch pad cable to the connector on the touch
pad assembly.
2. Seat the fingerprint sensor cable on the touch pad.
3. Stick a new double-sided tape in place.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the removed double-sided tape.
4. Install a new touch pad to the slot and touch pad cover on it.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the removed touch pad.
5. Secure the touch pad assembly with the following screws.
• M2×4B
BIND screw
×4
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.12 SW membrane
4.12 SW membrane
Removing the SW membrane
To remove the SW membrane, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-17 and 4-18.
1. Lift up the hook and slide the SW membrane holder in the direction of the arrow in
the figure to remove it.
SW membrane holder
Hook
Figure 4-17 Removing the SW membrane (1)
4-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.12 SW membrane
4 Replacement Procedures
2. Push down the hook and slide the SW membrane in the direction in the figure below.
3. Remove the SW membrane.
Hook
SW membrane
Figure 4-18 Removing the SW membrane (2)
Installing the SW membrane
To install the SW membrane, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-17 and 4-18.
1. Install the SW membrane in the SW membrane holder while sliding it in the
opposite direction at removing.
2. Install the SW membrane holder (with the SW membrane) to the slot while sliding
it in the opposite direction at removing.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.13 Bluetooth module
4.13 Bluetooth module
Removing the Bluetooth module
To remove the Bluetooth module, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-19.
1. Remove the following screws to remove the Bluetooth module.
• M2×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
2. Disconnect the Bluetooth cable from the connector CN4400 on the system board.
3. Disconnect the Bluetooth cable and Bluetooth antenna cable from the connector on
the Bluetooth module.
Bluetooth cable
M2×4B FLAT HEAD
Bluetooth module
CN4400
Bluetooth antenna cable
Figure4-19 Removing the Bluetooth module
4-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.13 Bluetooth module
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Bluetooth module
To install the Bluetooth module, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-19.
1. Connect the Bluetooth cable and Bluetooth antenna cable to the connector on the
Bluetooth module.
2. Connect the Bluetooth cable to the connector CN4400 on the system board.
3. Secure the Bluetooth module with the following screws.
• M2×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.14 Wireless LAN card
4.14 Wireless LAN card
Removing the Wireless LAN card
To remove the wireless LAN card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-20.
1. Peel off the glass tape.
2. Disconnect the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) from the wireless
LAN card using an antenna coaxial cable disconnector.
3. Remove the following screws and wireless LAN card cover.
• M2×4B
BIND screw
×1
• Security torx screw or M2×4B BIND screw
×1
NOTE: In models with 11ch type of 802.11 a/b/g wireless LAN card, the wireless LAN
card cover and security torx screw are used.
4. With grasping both the sides, disconnect the wireless LAN card from the connector
CN2600 on the system board.
Glass tape
Security torx or
M2x4B BIND
Wireless LAN card cover
Wireless LAN card
M2x4B BIND
Wireless LAN antenna
cables
CN2600
Figure 4-20 Removing the wireless LAN card
4-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.14 Wireless LAN card
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Wireless LAN card
To install the wireless LAN card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-20.
1. Insert slantingly the wireless LAN card into the connector CN2600 on the system
board.
2. Gently push the wireless LAN card down and secure the wireless LAN card with the
following screw.
• M2×4B
BIND screw
×1
3. Seat the wireless LAN card cover in place and secure it with the following screw.
• Security torx screw or M2×4B BIND screw
×1
4. Connect the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) to the connectors on the
wireless LAN card.
5. Stick the glass tape.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.15 MDC (Modem Daughter Card)
4.15 MDC (Modem Daughter Card)
Removing the MDC
To remove the MDC, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-21.
1. Remove the following screws securing the MDC.
• M2×4B BIND screw
×2
CAUTION: When removing the MDC, lift it up right above. Otherwise, the MDC or
connector may be damaged.
2. Lift up the MDC to disconnect it from the connector CN3010 on the system board.
3. Disconnect the modem cable from the connector on the MDC.
M2×4B BIND
MDC
CN3010
Modem cable
Figure 4-21 Removing the MDC (Modem Daughter Card)
4-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.15 MDC (Modem Daughter Card)
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the MDC
To install the MDC, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-21.
1. Connect the modem cable to the connector on the MDC.
2. Set the MDC and press it carefully to connect it to the connector CN3010 on the
system board. Be careful not to damage the MDC and connector.
3. Secure the MDC with the following screws.
• M2×4B BIND screw
×2
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.16 Internal microphone
4.16 Internal microphone
Removing the Internal microphone
To remove the internal microphone, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-22.
1. Peel off the glass tape and take out the microphone holder.
2. Disconnect the microphone cable from the connector CN6050 on the system board
and take out the internal microphone from the slot.
Glass tape
Microphone
holder
Internal
microphone
CN6050
Figure 4-22 Removing the internal microphone
4-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.16 Internal microphone
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Internal microphone
To install the internal microphone, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-22.
1. Install the internal microphone and microphone holder to the slot of the front panel.
CAUTION: When installing the microphone, the projection of the microphone shall
contact the guide of the base assembly as shown in the following figure.
Microphone
Projection
Guide
2. Connect the microphone cable to the connector CN6050 on the system board
3. Stick the glass tape on the microphone cable.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.17 RTC battery
4.17 RTC battery
WARNING: When replacing the RTC battery, be sure to use a genuine battery
authorized by Toshiba. Installing the wrong battery could cause a battery
explosion or other damage.
If the RTC battery is found abnormal, it must not be installed. Replace it
with a new battery, and dispose of the old one according to the local
regulations.
Check for any of the following signs of damage:
1) Electrolyte leakage
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Corrosion (greenish color) on the battery connector or cable
Corrosion on the computer’s battery connector
White powder on any part of the battery
White powder in the battery tray
Clear liquid on the battery
Clear liquid in the battery tray
Clear liquid on any board near the battery
2) Damage to the connection cable
3) Damage to the connector housing
If any powder or liquid is found in or around the battery tray, clean it. Be
careful not to let any leaked material contact your eyes or mouth. Do not
inhale fumes from leaked material.
If leaked material contacts your skin, eyes or mouth, wash the affected area
thoroughly with clean water.
4-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.17 RTC battery
4 Replacement Procedures
Removing the RTC battery
To remove the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-23.
1. Disconnect the RTC battery cable from the connector CN9300 on the system board.
2. Open the insulator and remove the RTC battery.
RTC battery cable
CN9300
RTC battery
Insulator
Figure 4-23 Removing the RTC battery
Installing the RTC battery
To install the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-23.
1. Set the RTC battery in place and wrap it with the insulator.
2. Connect the RTC battery cable to the connector CN9300 on the system board.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.18 Harness holder / LAN cable
4.18 Harness holder / LAN cable
To remove the Harness holder / LAN cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-24
and 4-25.
1. Disconnect the LCD cable and LAN cable from the connectors CN5000 and
CN4100 on the system board.
2. Remove the following screw securing the harness holder.
• M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
LCD cable
CN5000
LAN cable
CN4100
Figure 4-24 Removing the Harness holder / LAN cable (1)
4-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.18 Harness holder / LAN cable
4 Replacement Procedures
3. Take out the LAN cable from the harness holder.
4. Remove the harness holder while lifting up the LCD cable and LAN cable.
5. Take out the LAN jack from the LAN jack slot.
Harness holder
LAN cable
LAN jack
Harness holder
Figure 4-25 Removing the Harness holder / LAN cable (2)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.18 Harness holder / LAN cable
Installing the Harness holder / LAN cable
To install the Harness holder / LAN cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-24
and 4-25.
1. Install the LAN jack into the slot.
2. Pass the LCD cable and LAN cable in the guide of the harness holder and install the
harness holder and secure it with the following screw.
• M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
CAUTION: When passing the LCD cable and LAN cable, refer to the following figure.
Harness holder
LCD cable
LAN cable
3. Connect the LCD cable and LAN cable to the connectors CN5000 and CN4100 on
the system board.
4-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.19 System board / DC-IN jack
4 Replacement Procedures
4.19 System board / DC-IN jack
To remove the System board / DC-IN jack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-26 to
4-28.
1. Remove two glass tapes on the wireless LAN antenna cable and speaker cable.
2. Disconnect the speaker cable from the connector CN6170 on the system board.
Speaker cable
Glass tape
CN6170
Glass tape
Wireless LAN antenna cable
Figure 4-26 Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (1)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.19 System board / DC-IN jack
3. Take out the DC-IN jack from the slot and remove the system board left-upward
with the left side up.
System board
DC-IN jack
Figure 4-27 Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (2)
4. Disconnect the DC-IN jack cable from the connector CN8800 on the system board.
DC-IN jack cable
CN8800
Figure 4-28 Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (3)
Installing the System board / DC-IN jack
4-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.19 System board / DC-IN jack
4 Replacement Procedures
To install the System board / DC-IN jack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-26 to
4-28.
1. Connect the DC-IN jack cable to the connector CN8800 on the system board.
2. Insert the right side connectors of the system board into the slots of the base assembly
and install the system board.
3. Insert the DC-IN jack in to the slot of base assembly.
4. Connect the speaker cable to the connector CN6170 on the system board.
5. Stick two glass tapes on the wireless LAN cable and speaker cable.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.20 Modem jack / Wireless communication SW
4.20 Modem jack / Wireless communication SW
To remove the Modem jack / Wireless communication SW, follow the steps below and refer
to Figure 4-29 to 4-30.
1. Remove the following screw and the Modem jack holder.
• M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
2. Remove the Modem jack stuck to the base assembly with a double sided tape from
the slot.
3. Open the insulator and remove the Modem jack cable from the slot of the base
assembly.
Modem jack holder
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Modem jack cable
Modem jack
Insulator
Figure 4-29 Removing the Modem jack
4-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.20 Modem jack / Wireless communication SW
4 Replacement Procedures
4. Push the wireless communication SW from the inside of the base assembly to
remove.
Wireless communication SW
Figure 4-30 Removing the wireless communication SW
Installing the Modem jack / Wireless communication SW
To install the Modem jack / Wireless communication SW, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-29 and 4-30.
1. Insert the wireless communication SW into the hole of the base assembly from the
outside.
2. Install the Modem jack into the slot of the base assembly and pass the Modem jack
cable into the slot and close the insulator.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.20 Modem jack / Wireless communication SW
3. Install the Modem jack holder and secure it with the following screw.
• M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD screw ×1
CAUTION: When installing the Modem jack holder, insert the tip of the modem jack
holder under the hook of the base assembly.
Hook
Modem jack holder
CAUTION: When installing the wireless communication SW, make sure the switch of the
wireless communication SW works properly.
Switch
4-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.21 Fan/CPU
4 Replacement Procedures
4.21 Fan/CPU
Removing the Fan/CPU
To remove the fan/CPU, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-31 to 4-33.
CAUTION: 1) The CPU can become very hot during operation. Be sure to let it cool
before starting repair work.
2) When you remove the heat sink, wipe the grease off of the bottom of the
heat sink and top of the CPU. Apply new grease when installing.
1. Remove the glass tape on the back of the system board and disconnect the fan cable
from the connector CN8771 on the system board.
2. Remove the following screws securing the CPU holder in the opposite order of the
marks (number) on the holder and remove the CPU holder.
• M2×4B BIND screw
×3
M2×4B BIND
CPU holder
Glass tape
Fan cable
CN8781
Figure 4-31 Removing the CPU holder
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.21 Fan/CPU
3. Remove the following screws and fan.
• M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
Fan
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Figure4-32 Removing the fan
4. Unlock the CPU by turning the cam counterclockwise on the CPU socket by 90
degrees with a flat-blade screwdriver.
Figure 4-33 Removing the CPU
5. Remove the CPU.
CAUTION: When removing the CPU, lift it up right above. Otherwise, pins of CPU may
be damaged.
4-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.21 Fan/CPU
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Fan/CPU
To install the fan/CPU, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-31 to 4-35.
1. Make sure the cam is in the open position.
2. Seat the CPU in the CPU socket. Make sure the direction and position of CPU is
correct to avoid damaging pins on the CPU.
CAUTION: Place the CPU in such direction as shown below. (Pay attention to the
position of the triangle mark on the CPU.)
3. Fix the CPU by turning the cam on the CPU socket by 90 degrees clockwise with a
flat-blade screwdriver (in the order shown in the figure below).
Figure 4-34 Installing the CPU
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.21 Fan/CPU
4. Apply new grease on the CPU using a special syringe as shown in the following
figure. Apply quarter of scale (0.25ml) of grease evenly on the CPU chip. When
silicon grease is already applied to the CPU, wipe them off with a close in advance.
CAUTION: When installing the CPU, apply new grease on the top of the CPU chip.
When installing the fin, make sure the bottom of the fin covers the top of the
CPU.
Figure 4-35 Applying new grease
5. Install the CPU heat sink.
6. Place the CPU holder and secure it with the following screws in the order of the
number marked on the holder.
• M2×4B
BIND screw
×3
CAUTION: Tighten the screws in the order of mark “1”, “2” and “3” on the CPU
holder.
7. Place the fan and secure it with the following screws.
• M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
8. Connect the fan cable to the connector CN8781 and stick the glass tape.
4-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.22 HDD cable/PC card slot
4 Replacement Procedures
4
Replacement Procedures
4.22 HDD cable/PC card slot
Removing the HDD cable/PC card slot
To remove the HDD cable/PC card slot, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-36 and
4-37.
1. Lift up the HDD cable from the slot of the HDD cable holder and remove the
following screw.
• M2×4B
BIND screw
×1
2. Remove HDD cable from the connector CN1850 on the system board.
3. Remove the HDD cable holder.
HDD cable
M2×4B BIND
HDD cable holder
CN1850
Figure 4-36 Removing the HDD cable
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.22 HDD cable/PC card slot
4. Peel the insulator and remove the following screws (on the back of the system
board).
• M2×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
5. Open two latches outward and remove the PC card slot from the system board.
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD
Insulator
PC card slot
Latch
Figure 4-37 Removing the PC card slot
Installing the HDD cable/PC card slot
To install the HDD cable/PC card slot, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-36 and 4-
37.
1. Install the PC card slot and secure it with the following screws.
• M2×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
2. Connect the HDD cable to the connector CN1850 on the back of the system board.
3. Install the HDD cable holder on the system board and secure it with the following
screw.
• M2×4B
BIND screw
×1
4. Arrange the HDD cable on the HDD cable holder in place.
4-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter
4 Replacement Procedures
4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter
Removing the LCD unit/FL inverter
To remove the LCD unit/FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-38 to 4-42.
1. Remove the following screws and lift up the display assembly right above to
separate it and base assembly.
• M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×3
Display assembly
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Figure 4-38 Removing the display assembly
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter
2. Remove the mask seals (2 points), mask rubbers (2 points) and following screws
securing the LCD mask.
• M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×4
3. Remove the LCD mask (stuck with a double-sided tape) while releasing the latches.
Mask rubber
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
Mask seal
Mask seal
Mask rubber
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
LCD mask
Figure 4-39 Removing the LCD mask
CAUTION: When releasing the latches, be sure to keep the following steps (order)
referring to the figure on next page.
1. Release the latches from the center toward the outside. ((1))
2. Release the latches from the top toward the bottom. ((2), (3) or (3), (2))
3. Release the latches on the bottom from the left toward the right. ((4))
4-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (continued)
(1)
(2)
(3)
The LCD mask is fixed to the
bezel (metal frame) of LCD with
double-sided tape on the back.
(4)
As shown in the figure, the bottom side of the LCD mask is fixed to the LCD
bezel with double-sided tape. If the LCD mask is pulled toward you in
removing it, the bezel may be deformed. When removing the bottom side, be
sure to remove it carefully while removing the double-side tape slowly.
When the bezel of LCD deformed, replace the LCD unit with new one.
When the LCD mask deformed, replace the display mask with new one.
4. Pull out the insulator under the LCD.
5. Remove the FL inverter while peeling off the double-sided tape.
6. Disconnect the cables from the FL inverter.
FL inverter
Insulator
Cable
Figure 4-40 Removing the FL inverter
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter
6. Carefully lift up the top of the LCD unit.
NOTE: When lifting up the top of the LCD unit, hold the corners of the LCD unit. The
top edge of LCD unit is sensitive area.
7. Remove two glass tapes securing the LCD cable.
8. Disconnect the LCD cable from the connector on the LCD unit and remove the LCD
unit.
CAUTION: When removing the LCD cable, be careful not to damage the connector.
LCD unit
LCD cable
Glass tape
Figure 4-41 Removing the LCD unit
4-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter
4 Replacement Procedures
9. Remove the following screws and two LCD supports from the LCD.
• M2×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×4
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD
LCD
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD
LCD support
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD
Figure 4-42 Removing the LCD support
NOTE: 1) Be careful not to apply pressure to the ICs along the edge of LCD unit. The
ICs are easily damaged.
2) For environmental reasons, do not throw away a malfunctioning LCD unit (or
FL). Please follow local ordinances or regulations for its disposal.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter
Installing the LCD unit / FL inverter
To install the LCD unit / FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-38 to 4-42.
1. Set two LCD supports to the LCD and secure them with the following screws.
• M2×3S
S-THIN HEAD screw
×4
CAUTION: When installing the LCD support, do not mistake the left for the right and
vice versa. “L” for the left, “R” for the right and “UP” for the up of the
bracket are marked on the bracket.
2. Stand the LCD unit on the display cover and connect the LCD cable to the connector
on the back of the LCD unit. Stick two glass tapes on the connector of the LCD.
3. Install the LCD unit to the display cover.
4. Connect two cables to the FL inverter.
5. Install the FL inverter in place while sticking the double-sided tape.
6. Insert the insulator under the LCD unit.
7. Install the LCD mask (with double-sided tape) while hooking the latches.
8. Secure the LCD mask with the following screws.
• M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×4
9. Stick the mask seals (2 points) and mask rubbers (2 points).
10. Install the display assembly to the base assembly and secure it with the following
screws.
• M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×3
4-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.24 Speaker/LCD cable
4 Replacement Procedures
4.24 Speaker/LCD cable
Removing the Speaker/LCD cable
To remove the speaker/LCD cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-43 and 4-44.
1. Turn up two insulators and peel off two glass tapes.
2. Take out the speakers from the slot.
Glass tape
Insulator
Speaker (right)
Insulator
Speaker (left)
Figure 4-43 Removing the speaker
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.24 Speaker/LCD cable
3. Remove the LCD cable holder while releasing hooks.
4. Take out the LCD cable from the slot.
LCD cable holder
LCD cable
Figure 4-44 Removing the LCD cable
Installing the Speaker/LCD cable
To install the speaker/LCD cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-43 and 4-44.
1. Seat the LCD cable to the slot and install the LCD cable holder.
2. Install the speakers into the slots.
3. Arrange the speaker cables in place and secure it with two insulators and two glass
tapes.
4-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.25 Cover latch
4 Replacement Procedures
4.25 Cover latch
Removing the Cover latch
To remove the cover latch, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-45.
1. Remove the cover cap while pushing three latches from the LCD cover latch side.
2. Remove the LCD cover latch. Be careful not lose the spring.
Cover cap
Spring
Cover latch
Latch
Figure 4-45 Removing the cover latch
Installing the Cover latch
To install the cover latch, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-45.
1. Install the cover latch in place. Be careful not lose the spring.
2. Set the cover cap and push it until the latches are engaged.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
Removing the Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
To remove the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-46.
1. Peel off five glass tapes securing the wireless LAN antenna cables and Bluetooth
antenna cable.
2. Remove the wireless LAN antennas and Bluetooth antenna from the slot of the
display assembly.
Glass tape
Wireless LAN antenna
Glass tape
Bluetooth antenna
Glass tape
Figure 4-46 Removing the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
To install the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-46.
1. Install the wireless LAN antennas and Bluetooth antenna on the display assembly
in place.
2. Stick five glass tapes to secure the wireless LAN antenna cables and Bluetooth
antenna cable.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.27 Hinge
4.27 Hinge
Removing the Hinge
To remove the hinge, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-47.
1. Remove the following screws, washers and hinges on the both sides.
• M2.5×5B
FLAT HEAD screw
Washer
×2
• M2.5
×2
2. Remove the following screws and hinge caps on the both sides.
• M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD screw ×2
Washer
M2.5×5B FLAT HEAD
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Hinge (right)
M2.5×5B FLAT HEAD
Hinge (left)
Hinge cap (right)
Washer
Hinge cap (left)
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Figure 4-47 Removing the hinge
4-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.27 Hinge
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Hinge
To install the hinge, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-47.
1. Install the hinge caps (left and right) and secure them with the following screws.
• M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
2. Install the hinge (left and right) and secure them with the washers and following
screws.
• M2.5×5B
FLAT HEAD screw
Washer
×2
• M2.5
×2
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.28 Battery slider
4.28 Battery slider
Removing the Battery slider
To remove the battery slider, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-48.
1. Release the latches of the battery sliders (left and right) and remove the slider caps
from the bottom of the computer.
2. Take out the battery sliders from the base assembly.
Battery slider
Latch
Latch
Latch
Figure 4-48 Removing the battery slider
Installing the Battery slider
To install the Battery slider, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-48.
1. Install the springs to the battery sliders and set them to the base assembly.
2. Install the slider caps to the base assembly from the bottom of the computer.
4-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
4
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
This system uses LCD modules from the following suppliers. The procedure for replacing
the fluorescent lamp is different for each LCD module. Refer to the appropriate procedure.
Type
Part No.
Supplier
TMD
SAMSUNG
Section
G33C0003C110
4.29.1
12.1-inch (SXGA+)
G33C0003K110
4.29.2
NOTE: - When working with a LCD module, always use a flat, grounded table.
- Handle the backlight unit in the environment without dust, such as on the clean
bench. Keep the worktable free from any screws or other material that may
scratch the LCD surface.
- Use an anti-static or protective sheet.
- When replacing the FL unit, cover with a finger protector or similar to prevent
soiling or scratching the LCD panel.
- Be careful when handling the lamp. Excessive force may break the lamp.
- Be careful not to soil or deform the lamp reflector.
- Make sure that the power of the LCD module is turned off before connecting or
disconnecting cables and connectors.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
4.29.1 Replacing the 12.1-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp
CAUTION: When replacing the fluorescent lamp, wear finger covers or gloves to avoid
contaminating or damaging the LCD panel. Be careful not to let dust or
other foreign substance into the module.
Disassembling the 12.1-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp
To disassemble the 12.1-inch XGA TMD fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer
to Figure 4-49 to 4-58.
Peeling off the tapes and insulation sheets
1. Place it on a flat surface that is free of foreign objects.
Make sure no dirt on the face to protect the surface of the LCD module from damage.
Put a protection sheet (e.g. soft cloth) on the face.
4-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
2. Remove insulation sheet (with the tape on the insulation side attached).
CAUTION: 1. Be careful not to damage the TAB, PCB, B/L reflection sheet.
2. Do not remove the insulation sheet to reuse it.
3. Do not damage the TAB and PCB when removing the double –sided tape
of the insulation sheet.
Tape on the side of bezel
Insulation sheet
Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of bezel
Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of
bezel
Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of
bezel
Serial Label
Disposal Label
CAUTION Label
Figure 4-49 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (1)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
Removing the screws
1. Remove the Insulation sheet from the side of Bezel.
2. Remove four screws on the right side and left side.
CAUTION: Be sure to use a Philips screwdriver with a point size 0 bit.
Insulation sheet
Serial Label
CAUTION Label
Disposal Label
Figure 4-50 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (2)
4-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
Removing the bezel
1. Without removing the insulation tape, turn the face of module up.
2. Release the four latches of the bezel and frame (two positions on each side).
3. Release the three latches on the top to remove the bezel from the cell (The bezel is
reused.). As the bezel and cell at the lower side are fixed with a double-sided tape,
remove the bezel solely.
CAUTION: 1.When releasing the latches, do not damage the TAB and PCB.
Release three latches
Double-sided tape in side of
the lower bezel.
Release four latches
Figure 4-51 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (3)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
Opening the PCB
1. Spread out the PCB horizontally.
CAUTION: 1. Be careful not to damage the FPC.
2. Spread the PCB after releasing the PCB latch on plastic frame.
PCB latch
Serial Label
Disposal Label
CAUTION Label
Figure 4-52 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (4)
4-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
Removing the cell with PCB
1. Remove the cell with PCB from the backlight unit as shown bellow.
CAUTION: 1. As the back light cell are fixed with a double-sided tape, remove the cell
with PCB slowly not to break the cell.
2. Be careful not to damage the TAB.
Cell with PCB
Double-sided tape
Figure 4-53 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (5)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
Assembling Fluorescent lamp
Check of the backlight for replacement
1. Check the following items.
Double-sided tape fixing the
The sheet shall not come out of the
frame.
The sheet shall not come out of the
frame.
The sheet shall not come
out of the frame.
The B/L cable shall no come out of the plastic frame.
Figure 4-54 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (6)
4-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
Assembling the cell with PCB
1. Turn the backlight on.
2. Check that the backlight is free of dust, foreign objects, or damage. Perform this
check also for the reverse side of the cell. Peel of the separation sheet of double-sided
tape fixing the cell of the back light. Then install the cell with PCB in the backlight
unit.
CAUTION: 1. Set the cell with PCB as far as it goes to the left upper of the backlight
unit.
2. be careful not to damage the TAB.
Cell
Double-sided tape fixing the cell
Figure 4-55 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (7)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
Folding the TAB/PCB
1. Fold down the TAB (PCB) toward the reverse side of the backlight unit.
CAUTION: 1. Be careful not to damage the TAB.
2. Latch PCB on the PCB latch of the plastic frame.
PCB latch
Serial Label
CAUTION Label
Disposal Label
Figure 4-56 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (8)
4-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
Setting the bezel
1. Put the bezel on the top of the frame and latch at four points. ((1) in the bellow
figure)
2. Put the bezel on the bottom of the frame and latch at three points. ((2) in the bellow
figure)
3. Hold the bottom side lightly and stick a double-side tape.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the cell, TAB and B/L.
The reflector shall not
Latch at three point.
come out of the bezel.
Double-sided tape inside of
the bottom of the bezel
Latch at four
points
The reflector shall not
come out of the bezel.
Figure 4-57 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (9)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
Fixing the PCB and bezel
1. Fixing the PCB and bezel with four screws at the right side and left side (four points)
as shown in the following figure.
CAUTION: 1. The tightening torque must be 0.167 N m (1.7kgf･cm) for all the screws.
There shall not be screw floating.
2. Use an insert bit of point size 0 for the Philips screwdrivers.
Attaching tapes and insulation sheet
1. Attach the double-sided tape of insulation sheet as shown in the following figure.
CAUTION: When attaching tape and insulation sheet, be careful not to damage the
PCB, cell and B/L.
Tape on the side of bezel
Insulation sheet
Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of bezel
Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of bezel
with double-sided
Insulation sheet
tape of bezel
Serial Label
CAUTION Label
Disposal Label
Figure 4-58 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (10)
4-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
4.29.2 Replacing the 12.1-inch WXGA Samsung Fluorescent Lamp
To replace the 12.1-inch WXGA Samsung fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer
to figures 4-59 to 4-62.
Removing the fluorescent lamp
1. Remove the PCB cover.
PCB cover
Figure 4-59 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (1)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
2. Remove the lamp-wire tape and Al tape.
White tape (left)
White tape (bottom)
Al tape (bottom)
Figure 4-60 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (2)
3. Remove the top chassis from the molded frame.
CAUTION: Remove in the order of bottom hook and side hook..
Figure 4-61 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (3)
4-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
4. Separate the panel assembly and the backlight unit.
CAUTION: Handle with care not to damage the COF and G/D ICs.
Panel assembly
Figure 4-62 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (4)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
Assembling the fluorescent lamp
The assembly procedure of the 12.1-inch Samsung fluorescent lamp is the reverse of the
above disassembly procedure. Refer to figures 4-59 to 4-62.
1. Install the panel assembly on the backlight unit.
2. Install the top chassis on the molded frame.
3. Stick the white tape and Al tape.
4. Stick the PCB cover.
4-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
App-ii
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix
Contents
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ...........................................................................A-1
Appendix B Board Layout.................................................................................................B-1
B.1
B.2
B.3
System Board (FBMOS*) Front View...................................................................B-1
System Board (FBMOS*) Back View ...................................................................B-3
Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) Front and Back View.................................B-5
Appendix C Pin Assignments ............................................................................................C-1
System board
C.1
CN1400 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin)..........................................................C-1
CN1410 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin)..........................................................C-4
CN1850 Main HDD interface connector (11-pin)................................................C-7
CN1810 ODD interface connector (50-pin) .........................................................C-8
CN2110 PC card interface connector (70-pin) .....................................................C-9
IS2101 MEDIA BRIDGE interface connector (42-pin) .....................................C-10
CN2600 Wireless LAN card interface connector (52-pin) .................................C-11
CN3010 MDC interface connector (12-pin).......................................................C-12
CN3200 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin) ................................................C-12
CN3240 PAD interface connector (8-pin) ..........................................................C-13
CN3260 SW membrane interface connector (13-pin) ........................................C-13
CN4100 LAN interface connector (12-pin)........................................................C-13
CN3490 LPC debug port interface connector (12-pin) ......................................C-14
CN4200 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin) ................................................C-14
CN4400 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin) ................................................C-14
CN4614 USB 6/4 connector (8-pin) ...................................................................C-15
CN4614 USB 0 connector (4-pin) ......................................................................C-15
CN5000 LCD interface connector (40-pin)........................................................C-16
CN5080 RGB connector (15-pin).......................................................................C-17
CN6050 Internal microphone connector (2-pin) ................................................C-17
J6051 External microphone connector (5-pin) ...................................................C-17
CN6170 Speaker connector (4-pin) ....................................................................C-17
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.6
C.7
C.8
C.9
C.10
C.11
C.12
C.13
C.14
C.15
C.16
C.17
C.18
C.19
C.20
C.21
C.22
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
App-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
C.23
C.24
C.25
C.26
C.27
C.28
J6310 Headphone connector (5-pin)...................................................................C-18
CN8800 DC-IN connector (4-pin)......................................................................C-18
CN8810 Main Battery connector (10-pin)..........................................................C-18
CN9300 RTC Battery connector (3-pin).............................................................C-18
CN8771 FAN interface connector (4-pin) ..........................................................C-19
CN9520 Fingerprint Sensor board interface connector (6-pin)..........................C-19
Fingerprint Sensor Board
C.29
CN9550 System board interface connector (6-pin) ............................................C-25
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes ................................................................D-1
Appendix E Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1
E.1
E.2
United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard .......................................................................... E-1
United States (US) Keyboard................................................................................. E-1
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams ........................................................................................... F-1
F.1
F.2
LAN Loopback Connector..................................................................................... F-1
RGB Monitor Loopback Connector....................................................................... F-1
Appendix G BIOS rewrite Procedures ............................................................................ G-1
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite Procedures....................................................................... H-1
Appendix I Reliability .........................................................................................................I-1
App-iv
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Figures
Figure B-1
Figure B-2
Figure B-3
System Board (FBMOS*) layout (front) .......................................................B-1
System Board (FBMOS*) layout (back) .......................................................B-3
Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) layout (front/back) ............................B-5
Figure E-1
Figure E-2
UK keyboard.................................................................................................. E-1
US keyboard................................................................................................... E-1
Figure F-1
Figure F-2
LAN Loopback Connector............................................................................. F-1
RGB Monitor Loopback Connector .............................................................. F-1
Tables
Table B-1 System board (FBMOS*) ICs and connectors (front)......................................B-2
Table B-2 System board (FBMOS*) connectors (back) ..................................................B-4
Table B-3 Fingerprint Sensor board (FBMOF*) connector (back)...................................B-5
System board
Table C-1
Table C-2
Table C-3
Table C-4
Table C-5
Table C-6
Table C-7
Table C-8
Table C-9
Table C-10
Table C-11
Table C-12
SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin).................................................................C-1
SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin).................................................................C-4
Main HDD interface connector (11-pin) .......................................................C-7
ODD interface connector (50-pin).................................................................C-8
PC card interface connector (70-pin) ............................................................C-9
MEDIA BRIDGE interface connector (42-pin) ..........................................C-10
Wireless LAN card interface connector (52-pin) ........................................C-11
MDC interface connector (12-pin)..............................................................C-12
Keyboard interface connector (34-pin) .......................................................C-12
PAD interface connector (8-pin)..................................................................C-13
SW membrane interface connector (13-pin) ...............................................C-13
LAN interface connector (12-pin)...............................................................C-13
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
App-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Table C-13
Table C-14
Table C-15
Table C-16
Table C-17
Table C-18
Table C-19
Table C-20
Table C-21
Table C-22
Table C-23
Table C-24
Table C-25
Table C-26
Table C-27
Table C-28
LPC debug port interface connector (12-pin)..............................................C-14
IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin)........................................................C-14
Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin) .......................................................C-14
USB 6/4 connector (8-pin) ..........................................................................C-15
USB 0 connector (4-pin) .............................................................................C-15
LCD interface connector (40-pin) ...............................................................C-16
RGB connector (15-pin)..............................................................................C-17
Internal microphone connector (2-pin)........................................................C-17
External microphone connector (5-pin).......................................................C-17
Speaker connector (4-pin) ...........................................................................C-17
Headphone connector (5-pin)......................................................................C-18
DC-IN connector (4-pin) .............................................................................C-18
Main Battery connector (10-pin).................................................................C-18
RTC Battery connector (3-pin)....................................................................C-18
FAN interface connector (4-pin)..................................................................C-19
Fingerprint Sensor board interface connector (6-pin) .................................C-19
Finger print Sensor Board
Table C-29
System board interface connector (6-pin) ...................................................C-25
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) .............................................................................D-1
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key..........................................................................D-5
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode ..........................................................................D-6
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key....................................................................................D-6
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode.............................................................................D-7
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code.......................................................................................D-7
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code.......................................................................................D-8
Table I-1
MTBF................................................................................................................ I-1
App-vi
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Appendices
Appendix A
P
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Precautions for handling the LCD module
The LCD module can be easily damaged during assembly or disassembly. Observe the
following precautions when handling the LCD module:
1. When installing the LCD module in the LCD cover, be sure to seat it so that it is
properly aligned and maximum visibility of the display is maintained.
2. For the LCD module, be careful to align the four holes at the right side and left side
of the LCD module with the corresponding holes in the LCD cover before securing
the module with four screws.
Do not force the module into place, because stress can affect its performance.
Also, the panel’s surface is easily scarred, so be carefully when handling it.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
3. If the panel’s surface gets dirty, wipe it with cotton or a soft cloth. If it is still dirty,
try breathing on the surface to create a light condensate and wipe it again.
If the surface is very dirty, we recommend a LCD cleaning agent. Apply the agent to
a cloth and then wipe the panel’s surface. Do not apply cleanser directly to the panel.
LCD
4. If water or other liquid is left on the panel’s surface for a long period, it can change
the screen’s tint or stain it. Be sure to quickly wipe off any liquid.
A-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Appendices
5. Glass is used in the panel, so be careful not to drop it or let it strike a hard object,
which could cause breakage or cracks.
6. CMOS-LSI circuits are used in the module, so guard against damage from
electrostatic discharge. Be sure to wear a wrist or ankle ground when handling the
module.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
7. Do not expose the module to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet rays for long periods.
8. Do not store the module at temperatures below specifications. Cold can cause the
liquid crystals to freeze, lose their elasticity or otherwise suffer damage.
A-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Appendices
9. Do not disassemble the LCD module. Disassembly can cause malfunctions.
10. If you transport the module, do not use packing material that contains epoxy resin
(amine) or silicon glue (alcohol or oxime). These materials can release gas that can
damage the panel’s polarization.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
A-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Board Layout
Appendices
Appendix B Board Layout
B.1 System Board (FBMOS*) Front View
Figure B-1 System board (FBMOS*) layout (front)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix B Board Layout
Table B-1 System board (FBMOS*) ICs and connectors (front)
Number
CN4100
CN3230
CN8781
CN2600
IC2000
CN3240
IC1600
CN3010
CN9300
CN6050
J6051
Name
LAN jack
Keyboard connector
Fan connector
Wireless LAN card connector
GMCH
Touch pad connector
ICH7-M
MDC interface connector
RTC battery connector
Internal microphone connector
External microphone connector
Headphone connector
Bridge media connector
Bluetooth module connector
Internal speaker connector
Memory module A connector
Memory module B connector
SW membrane connector
LCD connector
J6310
IS2101
CN4400
CN6170
CN1400
CN1410
CN3260
CN5000
CN9520
Fingerprint sensor board connector
B-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Board Layout
Appendices
B.2 System Board (FBMOS*) Back View
Figure B-2 System board (FBMOS*) layout (back)
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix B Board Layout
Table B-2 System board (FBMOS*) connectors (back)
Number
CN5080
CN4614
CN4200
CN1810
CN1850
CN4612
CN8810
IS1050
Name
RGB connector
USB 6/4 port
IEEEE1394 port
ODD connector
HDD connector
USB 0 port
Main battery connector
CPU socket
IS1200
GMCH
B-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Board Layout
Appendices
B.3 Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) Front and Back View
(front)
(back)
Figure B-3 Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) layout (front/back)
Table B-3 Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) connector (back)
Number
Name
CN9550
System board I/F connector
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix B Board Layout
B-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
Appendix C
Appendix C Pin Assignments
System board
C.1 CN1400 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin)
Table C-1 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin) (1/3)
Pin No.
Signal Name
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
1
MRVREF-B0V
GND
-
-
2
-
I/O
I/O
-
3
4
ADQ04-B1P
ADQ06-B1P
GND
5
ADQ07-B1P
ADQ00-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
ADM0-B1P
GND
I/O
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
ADQS0-B1N
ADQS0-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ05-B1P
ADQ01-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ03-B1P
ADQ02-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ12-B1P
ADQ13-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ14-B1P
ADQ08-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADM1-B1P
GND
I/O
-
ADQS1-B1N
ADQS1-B1P
GRD
I/O
I/O
-
MCK0-B1P
MCK0-B1N
GND
O
O
-
ADQ15-B1P
ADQ09-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ10-B1P
ADQ11-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
GND
-
GND
-
ADQ21-B1P
ADQ20-B1P
GND
I/O
-
ADQ17-B1P
ADQ16-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
ADQS2-B1N
ADQS2-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
NC
-
ADM2-B1P
GND
I/O
-
ADQ23-B1P
ADQ19-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ18-B1P
ADQ22-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ25-B1P
I/O
ADQ29-B1P
I/O
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Table C-1 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin) (2/3)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ADQ28-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
Pin No.
64
Signal Name
ADQ24-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
63
65
66
67
ADM3-B1P
NC
I/O
-
68
ADQS3-B1N
ADQS3-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
69
70
71
GND
-
72
73
ADQ30-B1P
ADQ26-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
74
ADQ27-B1P
ADQ31-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
75
76
77
78
79
MCKE0-B1P
1R8-B1V
O
-
80
MCKE1-B1P
1R8-B1V
NC
O
-
81
82
83
NC
-
84
-
85
ABS2-B1P
1R8-B1V
O
-
86
NC
-
87
88
1R8-B1V
AMA11-B1P
AMA07-B1P
AMA06-B1P
1R8-B1V
AMA04-B1P
AMA02-B1P
AMA00-B1P
1R8-B1V
ABS1-B1P
ARAS-B1N
MCS0-B1N
1R8-B1V
MODT0-B1P
AMA13-B1P
1R8-B1V
NC
-
89
AMA12-B1P
AMA09-B1P
AMA08-B1P
1R8-B1V
O
O
O
-
90
O
O
O
I
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
AMA05-B1P
AMA03-B1P
AMA01-B1P
1R8-B1V
O
O
O
-
98
O
O
O
-
99
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
130
132
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
125
127
129
131
AMA10-B1P
ABS0-B1P
AWE-B1N
1R8-B1V
O
O
I
O
I
O
-
-
ACAS-B1N
MCS1-B1N
1R8-B1V
O
O
-
O
I/O
-
MODT1-B1P
GND
O
-
-
GND
-
ADQ34-B1P
ADQ33-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ36-B1P
ADQ37-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQS4-B1N
ADQS4-B1P
I/O
I/O
ADM4-B1P
GND
O
-
C-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
Table C-1 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin) (3/3)
Pin No.
133
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
175
177
179
181
183
185
187
189
191
193
195
197
199
1T
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
134
136
138
140
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
162
164
166
168
170
172
174
176
178
180
182
184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
200
2T
Signal Name
ADQ35-B1P
ADQ32-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ39-B1P
ADQ38-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ44-B1P
ADQ41-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ40-B1P
ADQ45-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQS5-B1N
ADQS5-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADM5-B1P
GND
O
-
ADQ42-B1P
ADQ43-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ46-B1P
ADQ47-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ48-B1P
ADQ49-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ52-B1P
ADQ53-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
NC
-
MCK1-B1P
MCK1-B1N
GND
O
GND
-
O
ADQS6-B1N
ADQS6-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
ADM6-B1P
GND
O
-
ADQ55-B1P
ADQ51-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ54-B1P
ADQ50-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ56-B1P
ADQ57-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ60-B1P
ADQ61-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADM7-B1P
GND
O
ADQS7-B1N
ADQS7-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
ADQ58-B1P
ADQ62-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ59-B1P
ADQ63-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SMBDA0-P3P
SMBCK0-P3P
P3V
I/O
I/O
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.2 CN1410 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin)
Table C-2 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin) (1/3)
Pin No.
Signal Name
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
1
MRBREF-B0V
GND
-
-
2
-
I/O
I/O
-
3
4
BDQ01-B1P
BDQ04-B1P
GND
5
BDQ02-B1P
BDQ06-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
BDM0-B1P
GND
I/O
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
BDQS0-B1N
BDQS0-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ05-B1P
BDQ00-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ03-B1P
BDQ07-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ12-B1P
BDQ13-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ08-B1P
BDQ09-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDM1-B1P
GND
I/O
-
BDQS1-B1N
BDQS1-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
MCK3-B1P
MCK3-B1N
GND
O
O
-
BDQ10-B1P
BDQ11-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ14-B1P
BDQ15-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
GND
-
GND
-
BDQ16-B1P
BDQ21-B1P
GND
I/O
-
BDQ17-B1P
BDQ20-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
BDQS2-B1N
BDQS2-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
NC
-
BDM2-B1P
GND
I/O
-
BDQ23-B1P
BDQ22-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ18-B1P
BDQ19-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ29-B1P
I/O
BDQ25-B1P
I/O
C-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
Table C-2 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin) (2/3)
Pin No.
63
Signal Name
BDQ28-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
Pin No.
64
Signal Name
BDQ24-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
65
66
67
BDM3-B1P
NC
I/O
-
68
BDQS3-B1N
BDQS3-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
69
70
71
GND
-
72
73
BDQ26-B1P
BDQ27-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
74
BDQ30-B1P
BDQ31-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
75
76
77
78
79
MCKE2-B1P
1R8-B1V
O
-
80
MCKE3-B1P
1R8-B1V
NC
O
-
81
82
83
NC
-
84
-
85
BBS2-B1P
1R8-B1V
O
-
86
NC
-
87
88
1R8-B1V
BMA11-B1P
BMA07-B1P
BMA06-B1P
1R8-B1V
BMA04-B1P
BMA02-B1P
BMA00-B1P
1R8-B1V
BBS1-B1P
BRAS-B1N
MCS2-B1N
1R8-B1V
MODT2-B1P
BMA13-B1P
1R8-B1V
NC
-
89
BMA12-B1P
BMA09-B1P
BMA08-B1P
1R8-B1V
O
O
O
-
90
O
O
O
I
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
BMA05-B1P
BMA03-B1P
BMA01-B1P
1R8-B1V
O
O
O
-
98
O
O
O
-
99
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
130
132
134
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
BMA10-B1P
BBS0-B1P
BWE-B1N
1R8-B1V
O
O
I
O
I
O
-
-
BCAS-B1N
MCS3-B1N
1R8-B1V
-
O
I/O
-
O
-
MODT3-B1P
GND
O
-
-
GND
-
BDQ32-B1P
BDQ33-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ36-B1P
BDQ37-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQS4-B1N
BDQS4-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDM4-B1P
GND
O
-
BDQ38-B1P
I/O
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Table C-2 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin) (3/3)
Pin No.
Signal Name
BDQ34-B1P
BDQ35-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
Pin No.
136
138
140
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
162
164
166
168
170
172
174
176
178
180
182
184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
200
2T
Signal Name
BDQ39-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
175
177
179
181
183
185
187
189
191
193
195
197
199
1T
BDQ44-B1P
BDQ45-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ40-B1P
BDQ41-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQS5-B1N
BDQS5-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDM5-B1P
GND
O
-
BDQ47-B1P
BDQ42-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ46-B1P
BDQ43-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ48-B1P
BDQ52-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ53-B1P
BDQ49-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
NC
-
MCK2-B1P
MCK2-B1N
GND
O
GND
-
O
BDQS6-B1N
BDQS6-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
BDM6
O
GND
-
BDQ51-B1P
BDQ54-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ50-B1P
BDQ55-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ57-B1P
BDQ61-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ56-B1P
BDQ60-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDM7-B1P
GND
O
BDQS7-B1N
BDQS7-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
BDQ58-B1P
BDQ59-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ62-B1P
BDQ63-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SMBDA0-P3P
SMBCK0-P3P
P3V
I/O
I/O
-
GND
-
P3V
-
GND
-
GND
-
C-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.3 CN1850 Main HDD interface connector (11-pin)
Table C-3 Main HDD interface connector (11-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZSATT0-P1P
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZSATT0-P1N
ZSATR0-P1N
GND
I/O
1
3
O
-
2
4
O
I
5
ZSATR0-P1P
P3V
I
6
-
7
-
8
GND
-
9
P5V
-
10
GND
-
11
1T
3T
GND
-
GND
-
2T
4T
GND
GND
-
-
GND
-
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.4 CN1810 ODD interface connector (50-pin)
Table C-4 ODD interface connector (50-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
-
1
3
5
2
4
6
-
-
GND
NC
O
I/O
PLTRS0-E3N +
RSTTIDB-P3N
PDD07-P3P
PDD06-P3P
PDD05-P3P
PDD04-P3P
PDD03-P3P
PDD02-P3P
PDD01-P3P
PDD00-P3P
GND
PDD08-P3P
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
7
8
PDD09-P3P
PDD10-P3P
PDD11-P3P
PDD12-P3P
PDD13-P3P
PDD14-P3P
PDD15-P3P
PDDREQ-P3P
PDIOR-P3N
GND
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
O
O
I
-
PDIOW-P3N
PIORDY-P3P
IDEIRQ-P3P
PDA1-P3N
PDA0-P3P
PDCS1-P3N
NC
PDDACK
NC
I
-
-
O
O
O
-
NC
O
-
PDA2-P3N
NC
-
SB-P5V
SB-P5V
SB-P5V
GND
-
-
SB-P5V
-
-
SB-P5V
-
-
GND
-
-
GND
GND
-
-
NC
GND
-
I
NC
NC
C-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.5 CN2110 PC card interface connector (70-pin)
Table C-5 PC card interface connector (70-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
ACAD00-EYP
ACAD03-PYP
ACAD07-PYP
ACAD09-PYP
ACAD12-PYP
ACCBE1-PYN
ACPERR-PYN
ACINT-PYN
MCVPPA-PYV
ACIRDY-PYN
ACAD18-PYP
ACAD21-PYP
ACAD23-PYP
ACAD25-PYP
ACAD27-PYP
ACD02-PYP
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
3
ACAD01-PYP
ACAD05-PYP
ACCBEO-PYN
ACAD11-PYP
ACAD14-PYP
ACPAR-PYP
ACGNT-PYN
MCVCCA-PYV
ACCLK-PYP
ACCBE2-PYN
ACAD20-PYP
ACAD22-PYP
ACAD24-PYP
ACAD26-PYP
ACAD29-PYP
ACCLKR-PYN
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
ACCD1-P3N
ACAD04-PYP
ACD14-PYP
ACAD10-PYP
ACD13-PYP
ACD16-PYP
ACLOCK-PYP
ACDEVS-PYP
MCVPPA-PYV
ACFRAM-PYN
ACD19-PYP
ACRST-PYN
ACREQ-PYN
ACAUDI-PYP
ACD28-PYP
ACD31-PYP
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
ACAD02-PYP
ACAD06-PYP
ACAD08-PYP
ACVS1-P3P
ACD15-PYP
ACA18-PYP
ACSTOP-PYP
MCVPPA-PYV
ACTRDY-PYN
ACD17-PYP
ACVS2-P3P
ACSERR-PYN
ACCBE3-PYN
ACSTSC-PYP
ACD30PYP
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I/O
I/O
-
I/O
ACCD2-P3N
GND
-
GND
-
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.6 IS2101 MEDIA BRIDGE interface connector (42-pin)
Table C-6 MEDIA BRIDGE interface connector (42-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
MSDAT2-P3P
MSBS-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
MSDAT3-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
3
4
5
6
FM-P3V
I
7
MSCLK-P3P
MSCD-P3N
MSSDIO-P3P
MSBS-P3P
FM-P3V
I/O
O
I/O
I/O
I
8
MSDAT3-P3P
MSDAT2-P3P
MSDAT1-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
2T
4T
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
1T
3T
MSCLK-P3P
MSSDIO-P3P
SM-P3V
I/O
I/O
I
GND
-
MSSDAT1-P3P
SDAT3-P3P
SDAT1-P3P
MSDAT3-P3P
MSDAT1-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
SDAT2-P3P
SDAT0-P3P
MSDAT2-P3P
MSSDIO-P3P
MSCLK-P3P
SDCMD-P3P
MXDCE-P3N
SMRDY-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
MXDWE-P3N
SMCLE-P3P
MXDRE-P3N
MXDCD-P3N
GND
I
I/O
I
I
I
-
-
SDCD-P3N
SDWP-P3P
GND
O
GND
-
O
GND
-
-
GND
-
GND
-
C-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.7 CN2600 Wireless LAN card interface connector (52-pin)
Table C-7 Wireless LAN card interface connector (52-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
PEWAKE-E3N
WCHDAT-P3P
WCHCLK-P3P
MPEXRQ-P3N
GND
I/O
I
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
P3V
I/O
-
3
O
O
I
4
GND
-
5
6
1R5-P1V
NC
-
7
8
-
9
-
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
2T
NC
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
1T
XPEWL-P3N
XPEWL-P3P
GND
O
O
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
GND
-
NC
-
(WLRFON-S3N)
PLTRS1-E3N
E3V
O
-
GND
-
ZPERWL-P1N
ZPERWL-P1P
GND
I
-
I
GND
-
-
1R5-P1V
SMBCK0-P3P
SMBDA0-P3P
GND
-
GND
-
O
O
-
ZPETWL-P1N
ZPETWL-P1P
GND
O
O
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
GND
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
1R5-P1V
GND
-
NC
-
-
NC
-
P3V
-
GND
-
GND
-
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.8 CN3010 MDC interface connector (12-pin)
Table C-8 MDC interface connector (12-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
1
3
2
4
-
-
ACZOT1-P3P
GND
I/O
-
NC
5
6
E3V
-
7
ACZSY1-P3P
ACZIN1-E3P
ACZRS1-E3N
GND
O
I/O
O
-
8
GND
-
9
10
12
2T
4T
6T
GND
-
11
1T
3T
5T
XAZBC1-P3P
GND
O
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
C.9 CN3200 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)
Table C-9 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
NUMLED-P5N
CAPLED-P5N
KBSC00-S3N
KBSC02-S3N
KBSC04-S3N
KBSC06-S3N
KBSC07-S3N
KBSC09-S3N
KBRT02-S3N
KBSC10-S3N
KBRT04-S3N
KBSC12-S3N
KBRT06-S3N
KBSC14-S3N
NC
I/O
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
ARWLED-P5N
P5V
I/O
I
I
3
I
4
I
5
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
6
KBSC01-S3N
KBSC03-S3N
KBSC05-S3N
KBRT00-S3N
KBSC08-S3N
KBRT01-S3N
KBRT03-S3N
KBSC11-S3N
KBRT05-S3N
KBSC13-S3N
KBRT07-S3N
KBSC15-S3N
NC
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
2T
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
1T
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
-
-
GND
GND
C-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.10 CN3240 PAD interface connector (8-pin)
Table C-10 PAD interface connector (8-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
1
3
-
-
2
4
-
GND
NC
-
I/O
I
5
IPDCLK-P5P
P5V
I/O
-
6
IPDDAT-P5P
P5V
7
8
1T
GND
-
2T
GND
-
C.11 CN3260 SW membrane interface connector (13-pin)
Table C-11 SW membrane interface connector (13-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
PNLOFF-S3N
NC
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
I
-
I
I
I
I
-
-
-
I
I
I
-
-
1
3
2
4
CDNEXT-S3N
GPBTNB-S3N
CDSTOP-S3N
NC
5
CDPREV-S3N
CDPLAY-S3N
GPBTNA-S3N
PWRSW-S3N
GND
6
7
8
9
10
12
11
13
1T
NC
-
GND
2T
GND
C.12 CN4100 LAN interface connector (12-pin)
Table C-12 LAN interface connector (12-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZMDI2P-EYP
ZMDI3P-EYP
ZMDI0P-EYP
ZMDI1P-EYP
NC
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZMDI2P-EYN
ZMDI3P-EYN
ZMDI0P-EYN
ZMDI1P-EYN
NC
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
2T
11
1T
LLINK-E3N
GND
O
LACT-E3N
GND
O
-
-
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.13 CN3490 LPC debug port interface connector (12-pin)
Table C-13 LPC debug port interface connector (12-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
P3V
I/O
-
1
3
-
2
4
LPCFRM
LAD0-P3P
LAD2-P3P
PLTRS2-E3N
P3V
DBGDET-P3N
LAD1-P3P
LAD3-P3P
X33DBG-P3P
GND
I
5
I/O
I/O
6
I/O
I/O
7
8
9
10
12
11
-
-
C.14 CN4200 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin)
Table C-14 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZTPB0-P3N
ZTPA0-P3N
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZTPB0-P3P
ZTPA0-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
1
3
2
4
1T
2T
2T
4T
GND
-
GND
-
C.15 CN4400 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin)
Table C-15 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
1
3
-
2
4
-
-
BTMDL-P3N
I
NC
5
NC
-
6
NC
-
7
NC
-
8
BTRST-S3N
NC
O
-
9
NC
-
10
12
14
16
18
20
2T
11
13
15
17
19
1T
GND
(GND)
NC
-
NC
-
-
-
WCHCLK-P3P
ZUSBBT-P3P
NC
O
I/O
-
ZUSBBT-E3N
NC
I/O
-
BT-P3V
GND
-
GND
-
-
C-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.16 CN4614 USB 6/4 connector (8-pin)
Table C-16 USB 6/4 connector (8-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
USBOPS-E5V
ZUSBP6-E3N
USBOPS-E5V
ZUSBP4-E3P
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZUSBP6-E3N
GND
I/O
I/O
-
1
3
2
4
I/O
-
5
6
ZUSBP4-E3N
GND
I/O
-
7
I/O
-
8
1T
2T
GND
-
C.17 CN4614 USB 0 connector (4-pin)
Table C-17 USB 0 connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
USB1PS-E5V
USBP0-E3P
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZUSBP0-E3N
GND
I/O
I/O
-
1
3
2
4
I/O
-
1T
2T
GND
-
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.18 CN5000 LCD interface connector (40-pin)
Table C-18 LCD interface connector (40-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
I/O
O
Pin No.
Signal Name
BRT10-P5P
FL-P5V
I/O
O
-
1
3
BRT2DA-S3P
2
4
Pulled up to FL-
P5V
O
5
FL-P5V
NC
-
-
6
FL-P5V
GND
-
-
7
8
9
GND
-
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
2T
4T
6T
GND
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
1T
3T
5T
P3V
-
PNL-P3V
ILDSDA-P3P
GND
-
PNL-P3V
ILDSCL-P3P
NC
-
I/O
-
I/O
-
NC
-
GND
-
NC
-
NC
-
GND
-
NC
-
NC
-
GND
-
NC
-
NC
-
GND
-
ZTXDA2-PYN
GND
O
-
ZTXDTA2-PYN
ZTXDTA1-PYN
GND
O
O
-
ZTXDTA1-PYN
ZTXDTA0-PYN
GND
O
O
-
ZTXDTA0-PYN
XTXCKA-PYN
GND
O
O
-
XTXCKA-PYN
GND
O
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
C-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.19 CN5080 RGB connector (15-pin)
Table C-19 RGB connector (15-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
RED-PXP
BLU-PXP
GND
I/O
O
O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
GRN-PXP
NC
I/O
O
-
1
3
2
4
5
6
GND
-
7
GND
-
8
GND
-
9
P5V
-
10
12
14
GND
-
11
13
NC
-
IDSDA-P3P
(IVSYNC-P2P)
I/O
O
CRTEN-P3N +
IHSYNC-P2P
O
15
1T
IDSCL-P5P
GND
I/O
-
2T
GND
-
C.20 CN6050 Internal microphone connector (2-pin)
Table C-20 Internal microphone connector (2-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
MICIN
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
A-GND
I/O
1
I
2
-
C.21 J6051 External microphone connector (5-pin)
Table C-21 External Microphone connector (5-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
A-GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
MICIN
(MICIN)
I/O
1
3
5
-
-
-
2
4
I
I
VREF1
NC
C.22 CN6170 Speaker connector (4-pin)
Table C-22 Speaker connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
SPOTR-PXN
SPOTL-PXP
I/O
O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
SPOTR-PXP
SPOTL-PXN
I/O
O
1
3
2
4
O
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.23 J6310 Headphone connector (5-pin)
Table C-23 Headphone connector (5-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
A-GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
HEADL-PXP
NC
I/O
O
-
1
3
5
2
4
HEADR-PXP
(SPKEN)
O
O
C.24 CN8800 DC-IN connector (4-pin)
Table C-24 DC-IN connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ADPDC
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
ADPDC
GND
I/O
1
3
-
-
2
4
-
-
C.25 CN8810 Main Battery connector (10-pin)
Table C-25 Main Battery connector (10-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
PVBL1
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
BTMP1
I/O
I
1
3
5
7
9
-
-
2
4
(DCHG)
PSCL-S5P
GND
M5V
-
I/O
-
6
PSDA-S5P
DBT10V-S5N
GND
I/O
O
-
8
GND
-
10
C.26 CN9300 RTC Battery connector (3-pin)
Table C-26 RTC Battery connector (3-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZS-PWCHKF
GND
I/O
O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
1
3
2
-
1T
GND
-
2T
GND
-
C-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.27 CN8771 FAN interface connector (4-pin)
Table C-27 FAN interface connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
P5V
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
FANG-P3P
I/O
I
1
3
-
-
2
4
(FPWM-S3P)
O
C.28 CN9520 Fingerprint sensor board interface connector (6-pin)
Table C-28 OF board interface connector (6-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZUSBFS-E3P
GND
I/O
I/O
1
3
2
4
I/O
O
-
-
-
-
ZUSBFS-E3N
FGSPON-S3N
GND
5
6
E3V
1T
2T
GND
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Fingerprint Sensor Board
C.29 CN9550 System board interface connector (6-pin)
Table C-29 System board interface connector (6-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
E3V
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
FGSPON-S3N
ZUSBFS-E3N
GND
I/O
-
-
I
I/O
-
1
3
2
4
GND
I/O
-
5
ZUSBFS-E3P
GND
6
-
1T
2T
GND
C-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendices
Appendix D
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (1/4)
Code set 1
Make Break
Code set 2
Break
Cap
No.
Keytop
Note
Make
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
‘ ~
1 !
2 @
3 #
4 $
5 %
6 ^
7 &
8 *
9 (
0 )
- _
= +
BkSp
Tab
Q
29
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
13
19
1A
1B
A9
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
0E
16
1E
26
25
2E
36
3D
3E
46
45
4E
55
66
0D
15
1D
24
2D
2C
35
3C
43
44
4D
54
5B
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
0E
16
1E
26
25
2E
36
3D
3E
46
45
4E
55
66
0D
15
1D
24
2D
2C
35
3C
43
44
4D
54
5B
*1
*1
*1
*1
W
E
R
T
Y
U
*1
*1
*1
*1
I
O
P
[ {
] }
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (2/4)
Code set 1
Code set 2
Break
Cap
Keytop
Note
No.
Make
Break
Make
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
\ ¦
2B
3A
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
AB
BA
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
5D
58
1C
1B
23
2B
34
33
3B
42
4B
4C
52
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
5D
58
1C
1B
23
2B
34
33
3B
42
4B
4C
52
*2
Caps Lock
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
*1
*1
*1
*1
K
L
; :
‘ “
43
44
45
Enter
1C
2A
56
9C
AA
D6
5A
12
61
F0
F0
F0
5A
12
61
*3
Shift (L)
No.102
key
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Z
X
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
1A
22
21
2A
32
31
3A
41
49
4A
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
1A
22
21
2A
32
31
3A
41
49
4A
C
V
B
N
M
*1
*1
*1
*1
, <
. >
/ ?
57
Shift (R)
36
B6
59
F0
59
D-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendices
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (3/4)
Code set 1
Code set 2
Break
Cap
No.
Keytop
Note
Make
Break
Make
58
60
Ctrl
Alt (L)
Space
ALT (R)
Ins
1D
38
9D
B8
B9
14
11
29
F0
F0
F0
14
11
29
11
70
71
6B
6C
69
75
72
7D
7A
74
*3
*3
61
39
62
E0 38
E0 52
E0 53
E0 B8 E0 11
E0 D2 E0 70
E0 D3 E0 71
E0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
75
E0
E0
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
76
Del
←
79
E0 4B E0 CB E0 6B E0
80
Home
End
↑
E0 47
E0 4F
E0 48
E0 50
E0 49
E0 51
E0 C7 E0 6C E0
81
E0 CF E0 69
E0 C8 E0 75
E0 D0 E0 72
E0
E0
E0
83
84
↓
85
PgUp
PgDn
→
E0 C9 E0 7D E0
E0 D1 E0 7A E0
86
89
E0 4D E0 CD E0 74
E0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
Esc
F1
01
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
81
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
76
05
06
04
0C
03
0B
83
0A
01
09
76
05
06
04
0C
03
0B
83
0A
01
09
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
*3
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (4/4)
Cap
No.
Code set 1
Make Break
Code set 2
Break
Keytop
Note
Make
78
07
122
123
124
126
202
203
204
F11
F12
57
58
D7
D8
F0
F0
78
07
*3
*3
PrintSc
Pause
Fn
Refer to table 2-25
Refer to table 2-25
*5
Win
E0
E0
5B E0 DB E0
5D E0 DD E0
1F E0
2F E0
F0
F0
1F
2F
App
Notes:
1. * Scan codes differ by overlay function.
2. * This key corresponds to key No. 42 in the 102 key mode.
3. * Combination with the Fn key makes different codes.
4. * Scan codes differ by mode.
5. * The Fn key does not generate a code by itself..
D-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendices
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key
Cap Key
Code set 1
Make Break
E0 AA E0 35 E0 B5 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 4A E0 F0 4A E0 12
Code set 2
No.
top
Make
Break
55
75
76
79
/
INS E0 AA E0 52 E0 D2 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 12
DEL E0 AA E0 53 E0 D3 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 12
E0 AA E0 4B E0 CB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 12
←
80 Home E0 AA E0 47 E0 C7 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 12
81
83
84
End E0 AA E0 4F E0 CF E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 12
E0 AA E0 48 E0 C8 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 12
E0 AA E0 50 E0 D0 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 12
↑
↓
85 PgUp E0 AA E0 49 E0 C9 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 12
86 PgDn E0 AA E0 51 E0 D1 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 12
89
E0 AA E0 4D E0 CD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 12
→
203
204
Win E0 AA E0 5B E0 DB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 12
App E0 AA E0 5D E0 DD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 12
Note : The table above shows scan codes with the left Shift key.
In the case of Key no. 55 Overlay mode only.
In combination with the right Shift key, scan codes are changed as listed below:
With left Shift
With right Shift
Set 1
Set 2
E0 AA ___________E0 B6
E0 2A ____________E0 36
E0 F0 12 _________E0 F0 59
E0 12 ____________E0 59
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode
Cap
No.
Key
Code set 1
Code set 2
Break
top
Make
Break
Make
75
76
INS
DEL
←
E0 2A E0 52 E0 D2 E0 AA E0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 53 E0 D3 E0 AA E0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 4B E0 CB E0 AA E0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12
79
80
Home E0 2A E0 47 E0 C7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12
81
End
↑
E0 2A E0 4F E0 CF E0 AA E0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 48 E0 C8 E0 AA E0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 50 E0 D0 E0 AA E0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12
83
84
↓
85
PgUp E0 2A E0 49 E0 C9 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12
PgDn E0 2A E0 51 E0 D1 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12
86
89
E0 2A E0 4D E0 CD E0 AA E0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 5B E0 DB E0 AA E0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA E0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12
→
203
204
Win
App
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key
Cap
Key
top
Code set 1
Make Break
Code set 2
Break
No.
Make
5A
43
58
ENT
CTRL
E0
E0
E0
1C
1D
38
E0
E0
E0
9C
9D
B8
E0
E0
E0
E0
E0
E0
F0
F0
F0
5A
14
11
14
11
60
LALT
121
122
123
ARROW
45
45
46
C5
77
77
7E
F0
F0
F0
77
77
7E
NUMERIC
Scrl
C5
C5
D-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendices
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode
Code set 1
Break
Code set 2
Break
Cap
No.
Keytop
(8)
Make
Make
09
10
11
23
24
25
26
37
38
39
40
52
54
55
8
9
0
U
I
48
49
37
4B
4C
4D
4A
4F
50
51
4E
52
53
C8
C9
B7
CB
CC
CD
CA
CF
D0
D1
CE
D2
D3
75
7D
7C
6B
73
74
7B
69
72
7A
79
70
71
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
75
7D
7C
6B
73
74
7B
69
72
7A
79
70
71
4A
(9)
(*)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(–)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(+)
(0)
(.)
O
P
J
K
L
;
M
.
/
(/)
E0
35
E0
B5
40
4A
E0
F0
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code
Key
top
Code set 1
Code set 2
Shift
Make
Break
Make
Break
Prt Sc Common E0 2A E0 37 E0 B7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7C E0 F0 7C E0 F0 12
E0 37
E0 37
54
E0 B7
E0 B7
D4
E0 7C
E0 7C
84
E0 F0 7C
E0 F0 7C
F0 B4
Ctrl +
Shift +
Alt +
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code
Key
top
Shift
Code set 1
Make
Code set 2
Make
Pause Common E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5 E1 14 77 E1 F0 14
*
F0 77
Ctrl*
E0 46 E0 C6
E0 7E E0 F0 7E
*: This key generates only make codes.
D-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E Key Layout
Appendices
Appendix E
Appendix E Key Layout
E.1 United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard
Figure E-1 UK keyboard
E.2 United States (US) Keyboard
Figure E-2 US keyboard
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix E Key Layout
E-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F Wiring diagrams
Appendices
Appendix F
Appendix F Wiring diagrams
F.1 LAN Loopback Connector
Figure F-1 LAN Loopback Connector
F.2 RGB Monitor Loopback Connector
Figure F-2 RGB Monitor Loopback Connector
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix F Wiring diagrams
F-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G BIOS rewrite procedures
Appendices
Appendix G
Appendix G BIOS rewrite procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the system BIOS program when you update the
system BIOS.
Tools
To rewrite the BIOS, you need the following tool:
‰ BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer that has renewed BIOS data.
Rewriting the BIOS
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC card.
4. Connect an USB FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into the USB
FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the tilde character key until a beep sounds.
For example
(US Keyboard)
(UK Keyboard)
(There is the key at the left side of the 1 key in the UK key board.)
6. The BIOS rewriting starts
7. When the process is completed, it beeps and the system automatically reboots.
NOTE:
1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer when you rewrite the BIOS.
2. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the BIOS. If the rewrite
fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
3
If you fail to rewrite BIOS, then when you next turn on the power, a message
may be displayed that the contents of the BIOS have been erased. In this
case, insert the BIOS rewriting disk and the BIOS will be rewritten.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix G BIOS rewrite procedures
G-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite procedures
Appendices
Appendix H
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the EC/KBC system program when you update the
EC/KBC system.
Tools
To rewrite the EC/KBC, you need the following tool:
‰ EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer
Rewriting the EC/KBC
NOTE: 1. Rewrite the EC/KBC only when instructed by a diagnostic disk release
notice.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer when you rewrite the EC/KBC.
3. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the EC/KBC.
If the rewrite fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
4. If you fail to rewrite EC/KBC, then when you next turn on the power, a
message may be displayed that the contents of the EC/KBC have been
erased. In this case, insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk and the
EC/KBC will be rewritten.
5. Normally it takes about 30 seconds to rewrite the EC/KBC. It may take 3
minutes (maximum), depending on the conditions of the computer or ICs.
The computer is not hung up. Allow sufficient time. Never reboot or turn off
the power to the computer before the rewriting is completed.
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC Card.
4. Connect an USB FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into the USB
FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the Tab key. (Keep holding down the key
until a beep sounds.) The EC/KBC rewriting starts.
6. When the EC/KBC rewrite is completed, the system is automatically turned off.
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
H-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite procedures
H-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix I Reliability
Appendices
Appendix I
Appendix I Reliability
The following table shows MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures).
Table I-1 MTBF
Time (hours)
MTBF
6,056
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
I-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix I Reliability
I-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|